JP2016163705A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having an appropriate reaction force in operation.SOLUTION: An energization device 362 is configured in a mode for suppressing an increase in burden that a player performing input operation receives in one portion of a movement range of at least an inclination device 310 and in a movement range separated from an initial position by a predetermined distance, thus reducing a burden that the player receives and preventing the player from getting tired.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a player is provided with an operated means for performing a push-in operation, and is controlled in such a manner that inputs are switched according to the push-in amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine (Patent Document 1).

2010-252949

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the reaction force generated when operating the operation member. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having a good reaction force generated when an operation member is operated.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, wherein the input means includes an operated means to be input by a player, Load changing means configured to apply a load in the direction opposite to the input operation to the operating means and change the load, and the load changing means transmits a biasing force to the operated means. And a second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the opposite side of the operated means with respect to the first urging means, and between the first urging means and the second urging means And an urging force change means formed so that the urging force generated by the first urging means and the second urging means can be changed with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. Means is moved between the first biasing means and the second biasing means. Comprising enabling an intermediate means disposed on, and a regulating configured to be capable of regulating means the movement of said intermediate means in a direction in which the first biasing means and second biasing means are connected in series.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the restricting means includes a plurality of contact means formed so as to be able to contact the intermediate means.

  A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the plurality of abutting means have different lengths in the moving direction of the intermediate means on the opposing arrangement surface arranged to face the intermediate means. Formed.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the reaction force during operation of the operation member can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, a plurality of positions for regulating the intermediate means can be provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the performance of each contact means can be made different.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a). It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a top exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a top surface exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a bottom exploded perspective view of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of an upper cover, (b) is a side view of the upper cover taken along arrow XIIb in FIG. 12 (a), and (c) is a top view of the upper cover. (A) is sectional drawing of the upper cover in the XIIIa-XIIIa line | wire of Fig.12 (a), (b) is a bottom perspective view of an upper cover. (A) is a front view of a lower cover, (b) is a side view of the lower cover taken along arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), (c) is a top view of the lower cover, (d ) Is a cross-sectional view of the lower cover taken along line XIVd-XIVd in FIG. FIGS. 14A to 14D are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device taken along a line corresponding to the XIVd-XIVd line in FIG. (A) is a top view of the shaft cover, (b) is a front view of the shaft cover, and (c) is a side view of the shaft cover taken along arrow XVIc in FIG. 16 (a). It is an upper surface exploded perspective view of a lower case. It is a bottom exploded perspective view of a lower case. (A) is a front view of an operation device, (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). It is a graph showing the load given to a tilting apparatus with respect to the tilting angle from the raising position of a tilting apparatus. It is a top surface exploded perspective view of the tilting device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the tilting device and the lower case. (A) to (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the tilting device and the lower case. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the tilting apparatus in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the tilting apparatus in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). It is a graph showing the load given to a tilting apparatus with respect to the tilting angle from the raising position of a tilting apparatus. (A) is a front perspective view of the rotary piston member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a partial front perspective view of a lower case, (c) is a partial front perspective view of a shaft cover. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the tilting apparatus in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the tilting apparatus in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in 4th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). It is a graph showing the load given to a tilting apparatus with respect to the tilting angle from the raising position of a tilting apparatus. It is a side view of the operation device in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a top view of an upper case, (b) And (c) is sectional drawing of the upper case and 3rd urging | biasing apparatus in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of Fig.36 (a). (A) is a side view of a rotating roller, (b) is a front view of the rotating roller at arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of Fig.36 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of Fig.36 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of Fig.36 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of FIG. It is a side view of the operation device in 6th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in 7th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in 8th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in 9th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a). (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of the operating device in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time change of the drive solenoid in a 1st operation pattern. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of an operation device. It is a fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of an operating device. It is the figure which showed the change of arrangement | positioning of the movement end member at the time of completion | finish of operation corresponding to the change of the time required to pedal-operate a tilting apparatus from a raise position to a fall position. It is the figure which showed the time change of the drive solenoid in a 2nd action | operation pattern. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of the operating device in 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time change of the drive solenoid in a 3rd operation pattern. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of an operation device. It is the figure which showed the change of the kind of reaction force given to the player corresponding to the change of the time required to pedal-operate a tilting apparatus from a raise position to a fall position. It is the figure which showed the time change of the drive solenoid in a 4th operation pattern. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of an operation device, (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the LXIIIb-LXIIIb line | wire of Fig.63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the LXIV-LXIV line | wire of FIG.63 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the LXIV-LXIV line | wire of FIG.63 (b). It is a disassembled perspective view of a drive motor and a transmission device. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission apparatus in the LXIV-LXIV line | wire of FIG.63 (b). (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of the operating device in 13th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of the operating device in 14th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of the operating device in 15th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of the operating device in 16th Embodiment. (A) and FIG.74 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of an operating device. It is a fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of an operating device. (A) is the fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device in 17th Embodiment, (b) is a fragmentary perspective view of an unusually shaped rotation member. It is an expanded view of the outer peripheral surface of a deformed rotating member. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of an operation device. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line | wire of Fig.19 (a) of an operation device.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 22, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball launched to the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) at power-on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a to have a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when an instruction to launch a ball is issued by the main control device 110. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor M1.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into the player, and the tilting device 310 is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. It is possible to move the area configured by. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a so that at least a finger of a hand can easily enter. Thereby, the player can make preparations for operating the tilting device 310 in such a manner that his / her finger is inserted into the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310.

  Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it demonstrates on the assumption that a player operates the swing operation member 310 with a left hand.

  6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. These are the partial front views of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.7 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a).

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position (initial position in the present embodiment), and in FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is disposed at the lowered position (the pushing end in the present embodiment). An example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player when, for example, a specific display (for example, a display “push in the pedal”) appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Before the specific display appears, the player stands by with his hand placed on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 6B). At this time, by placing the hand on the upper part of the rotation shaft of the tilting device 310, the player can operate the tilting device 310 immediately when a specific display appears while maintaining the tilting device 310 in the raised position. So you can easily wait.

  From the state shown in FIG. 6 (b), the tilting device 310 is operated by moving the tilting device 310 from the raised position to the lowered position by tilting the hand around the base of the hand (FIG. 7 (b)). reference). In the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to be able to detect an angle of tilting from the raised position.

  The housing recess 17 a of the upper plate 17 is disposed sufficiently away from the outer shape of the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the player grips the left and right side surfaces of the tilting device 310, it is possible to easily put a finger between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is moved (tilted) by applying a force in the direction of arrow F <b> 1 that draws a curve along the arc from the state shown in FIG. 6. That is, since the direction of the force for moving the tilting device 310 is not a straight line but a curved line, even if the player applies a large linear force to the tilting device 310 at the raised position (see FIG. 6), the tilting device 310 As it moves, the angle between the direction of force and the direction of movement of the tilting device 310 (the tangential direction of the rotation trajectory) increases. Therefore, the load applied to the tilting device 310 in the lowered position can be reduced (the linear force applied from the player can be partially released).

  FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 of the operation device 300 is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 6). As shown in FIG. 8, the operation device 300 is configured such that a tilting device 310 having a fan-shaped cross section is pivotally supported at an end on the near side and can be tilted with respect to a pushing operation (see FIGS. 6 and 7).

  FIG. 9 is an exploded top perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 9, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at the left and right end portions at the front side end portion (front end portion in FIG. 9), and the tilting device 310. A lower case 360 having a concave bearing portion 361a for supporting the ring member BR1 from the lower side and forming a pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side and facing the lower case 360. The rising position of the tilting device 310 is determined by being fastened and fixed to the lower case 360 and contacting the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is disposed between the recessed portion and the lower case 360. The upper case 370 is mainly provided with the tilting device 310 in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame.

  The lower case 360 is a member that supports the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Therefore, the tilting device 310 and the lower case 360 repeat contact and separation before and after the operation. When the tilting device 310 and the lower case 360 come into contact with each other, if a harness or the like housed in the lower case 360 is sandwiched, there is a risk of disconnection and failure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a positioning plate 363e formed in a plate shape is disposed on the front side of the power application device 363. By arranging wiring such as a harness in the space behind the positioning plate 363e, the harness or the like protrudes between the tilting device 310 and the receiving surface 361e, or between the piston member 362a and the action claw portion 332. It is possible to prevent pinching.

  FIG. 10 is an exploded top perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 11 is a bottom exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the tilting device 310 has a role as a decorative portion that is arranged at the top and has the highest degree of attention from the player, and is a portion that is pushed in by the player and has a light shielding effect. An upper cover 311 formed of a high material, a lower cover 320 which is overlapped with the upper cover 311 in the vertical direction and fastened to the upper cover 311 and formed of a light-transmitting material, and an upper cover 311 A shaft cover 330 that is fastened and fixed and sandwiches the lower cover 320 between the upper cover 311 with the action claw 332, a pair of shaft members 340 that are fitted between the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330, A curved member 350 having a comb-like comb-shaped portion 352 disposed between the rear end inside the cover 311 and the rear end outside the lower cover 320, and the upper cover 311 A drive motor M1 sandwiched between the lower cover 320 and a ring-shaped ring member BR1 that internally fits the extended shaft portion 313c of the upper cover 311 and the extended half shaft portion 331c of the shaft cover 330 are mainly included. Prepare for.

  The shaft member 340 is disposed in a pair of left and right, and includes a cylindrical tubular portion 341 that is fitted into the recessed portions 313b and 331b and the extended half shaft portions 313c and 331c of the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330, and A disk part 342 formed in a disk shape having a diameter larger than that of the cylindrical part 341 in the middle of the cylindrical part 341, and axial movement of the disk part 342 are locked, and the cylindrical part 341 is provided at a twisted portion. And a torsion spring 343 disposed in a state of being inserted.

  By arranging the pair of left and right shaft members 340, the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330 can be fastened and fixed through fastening screws in the vicinity of the center of the shaft center. As a result, even if a large load is applied by the player near the center of the shaft center (even if the player performs an erroneous operation), the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330 can be It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the center from being damaged.

  The diameter of the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 341 is set as a diameter that defines the allowable diameter reduction limit of the torsion spring 343. By setting the diameter, the reaction force generated from the torsion spring 343 during operation can be adjusted. That is, in the torsion spring, the elastic force can be increased by reducing the diameter of the circular portion. However, as long as the operating angle of the tilting device 310 increases, the torsion spring 343 can be reduced in the range where the diameter of the torsion spring 343 can be reduced. While the force can be increased, if the diameter reduction limit is reached during the operation of the tilting device 310, the lower arm 343a or the upper arm 343b is deformed relative to the circular portion even if the operating angle of the tilting device 310 is increased. Since it stays, the increase amount of the reaction force can be remarkably reduced.

  Therefore, the setting mode of the reaction force of the torsion spring 343 with respect to the operating angle of the tilting device 310 is the mode in which the elastic force increases in proportion to the change in the tilting angle of the tilting device 310, and the tilting of the tilting device 310 is halfway. It is possible to select from a mode in which the elastic force increases in proportion to the change in angle but the change in elastic force is suppressed from a predetermined angle. That is, the degree of freedom of setting the reaction force of the torsion spring 343 with respect to the operating angle of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The torsion spring 343 includes a lower arm 343a extending downward on the inner side in the axial direction of the tilting member 310 and an upper arm 343b extending upward on the outer side in the axial direction. The lower arm 343a is inserted into the through hole 331f of the shaft cover 330. At the same time, the upper arm 343b is locked to the notch 314a of the upper cover 311 and the notch 323a of the lower cover 320, and is locked to the belt-like convex portion 361b (see FIG. 9) of the lower case 360.

  In the torsion spring 343, the diameter reduction limit is restricted to the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 341, and the diameter expansion limit is restricted to the inner shape of the housing portions 313a and 331a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 343 from being excessively reduced in diameter or excessively expanded due to deterioration over time, quality of parts, or operation of the tilting device 310 in an unexpected operation mode. be able to. Thereby, since it can prevent that the torsion spring 343 deform | transforms rapidly, it can make it easy to maintain an elastic coefficient for a long period (several years).

  The diameter of the torsion spring 343 can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the outer diameter of the torsion spring 343 is set to be approximately the same as the inner peripheral diameter of the housing portion 313a, the outer peripheral portion of the torsion spring 343 contacts the housing portion 313a in the assembled state.

  Therefore, when the player performs an operation in a manner in which the player hits the vicinity of the upper half 313 of the cylinder, the elastic force of the torsion spring 343 (the force generated when expanding and contracting in the radial direction) is deformed (collapsed downward) of the upper half 313 of the cylinder. It can be used as resistance against such deformation. Thereby, since cylindrical upper half 313 can be supported from the lower side, it can prevent that cylindrical upper half 313 is damaged. That is, the torsion spring 343 has both an effect of generating a reaction force for returning the tilting device 310 to the raised position and an effect of preventing the upper half portion 313 of the upper cover 311 from being damaged.

  The bending member 350 includes a main body portion 351 having an I-shaped cross section that curves along the shapes of the bending wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 and the bending wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320, and a front side end portion of the main body portion 351 (see FIG. It mainly includes a comb-like portion 352 that extends to the right in a shape that conforms to the shape on the front side of the tenth paper, and a switching extension portion 353 that extends in the opposite direction of the comb-like portion 352.

  The main body 351 has a plate-like sandwiched portion 351a extending in the left-right direction from the back end (the back side in FIG. 10), and is recessed upward at a lower end portion adjacent to the sandwiched portion 351a. A fitting recess 351b provided between the inner side of the rear end portion (curved wall portion 316) of the upper cover 311 and the outer side of the rear end portion (curved wall portion 322) of the lower cover 320. It is pinched.

  The sandwiched portion 351 a is a plate portion that is curved along the shape of the curved wall portion 322, and is a portion that is sandwiched between the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 and the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320. .

  The comb-shaped portion 352 includes a protruding portion 352a protruding rightward from the main body portion 351 and a recessed portion 352b sandwiched between adjacent protruding portions 352a and recessed toward the main body portion 351 side. In this embodiment, they are arranged at equal intervals (intervals that are switched every time the tilting device 310 rotates (tilts) 3 ° in the assembled state).

  The switching extending portion 353 includes a protruding portion 353a protruding leftward from the main body portion 351, and a recessed portion 353b adjacent to the lower end of the protruding portion 353a and recessed toward the main body portion 351. . In the present embodiment, the boundary position between the protruding portion 353a and the recessed portion 353b is configured to match the intermediate position (half position) of the protruding portion 352a at the lower end of the comb-shaped portion 352.

  The drive motor M1 is provided with a pair of left and right, and includes a fan-shaped weight member M1a that is eccentrically supported by a rotary shaft that is rotationally driven. When the drive motor M1 is rotationally driven, the center of gravity of the weight member M1a is moved, and the tilting member 310 can be vibrated by the movement of the center of gravity, thereby increasing the expectation of the player who operates the tilting device 310. it can.

  Wirings such as a harness for supplying power to the drive motor M1 are hung from the left and right ends of the motor support portion 325 to the lower side of the tilting device 310. Then, it penetrates the lower surface of the decorative plate 363d via the lower side of the positioning plate 363e and enters the inside of the main body member 363a (see FIG. 17). Details will be described later.

  Next, the upper cover 311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. 12A is a front view of the upper cover 311, FIG. 12B is a side view of the upper cover 311 along the arrow XIIb in FIG. 12A, and FIG. 12C is the upper cover. 311 is a top view of 311. FIG. 13A is a cross-sectional view of the upper cover 311 taken along the line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 12A, and FIG. 13B is a bottom perspective view of the upper cover 311.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the upper cover 311 is disposed on a plate-shaped pressing plate portion 312 that is inclined upward from the near side to the far side, and on the near side end portion of the pressing plate portion 312. A cylindrical upper half 313 having a half-pipe shape whose outer shape extends in the left-right direction, and a vertical direction toward the rear end of the cylindrical upper half 313 in the front portion of the pressing plate 312 (FIG. 13). (A) a front side wall portion 314 extending in the vertical direction) and a rear side wall extending from the pressing plate portion 312 in parallel to the front side wall portion 314 with a predetermined interval behind the front side wall portion 314. Portion 315, a curved wall portion 316 that is curved and extended downward from the rear end portion of the pressing plate portion 312, and a lower wall portion of the curved wall portion 316 that extends along the same plane and that is And a bottom wall portion 317 that forms a bottom surface.

  The pressing plate portion 312 is configured to have a shape in which the center portion in the left-right direction protrudes upward compared to the outer portion in the left-right direction, and includes an opening 312 a on the opposite side of the cylindrical upper half 313. The opening 312a is a portion where the protruding portion 321a of the lower cover 320 protrudes, and the effect of light by the LEDs disposed on the decorative plate 363d (see FIG. 9) can be visually recognized through the lower cover 320.

  The cylindrical upper half 313 is a portion having the central axis of the cylinder the same as the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, and a housing portion 313 a that houses the torsion spring 343, and a central portion of the tilting device 310 from the housing portion 313 a. A concave portion 313b formed as a concave portion having a semicircular cross section toward the outside, and an inner peripheral surface having substantially the same shape (slightly large radius) as the concave portion 313b and facing outward of the tilting device 310 Extending half-shaft portion 313c extending in a half-pipe shape, and a fastening hole 313d which is disposed closer to the center of the tilting device 310 than the recessed portion 313b and to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the shaft cover 330 is fixed. When the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position, the overhanging contact portion 361g (see FIG. 9) of the lower case 360 and the overhanging contact portion 313e that is contacted in the circumferential direction are provided. Holding part 313a A planar wall-shaped registration wall portion 313f which is formed along a plane perpendicular to the rotational axis O1 in the opposite, mainly comprises.

  The accommodating portion 313 a forms a space in which the torsion spring 343 and the disk portion 342 of the shaft member 340 are accommodated. Since the disk part 342 is accommodated facing the extended half-shaft part 313c, the disk part 342 is axially contacted with the inner wall of the accommodating part 313a on the extended half-axis part 313c side (FIG. 16 (a)). ) Positional deviation in the horizontal direction) is prevented.

  The recessed portion 313b and the extended half shaft portion 313c are portions where the cylindrical portion 341 of the shaft member 340 is fitted together with the cylindrical lower half portion 331 of the shaft cover 330 in the assembled state of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 9). In addition, the extended half shaft portion 313c is fitted into the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 11).

  The fastening hole 313d is a screw hole to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the shaft cover 330 is fixed. In the assembled state of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 9), the cylindrical upper half 313 can be reinforced by the strength of the fastening screw fixed to the fastening hole 313d. Even if an operation such as hitting the front side portion of 310 is performed, the tilting device 310 can be prevented from being damaged.

  The overhanging contact portion 313e has an effect of producing by being visually recognized integrally with the decoration on the front side end portion of the lower case 360 (see FIG. 9), and the tilting device 310 moves upward and rises. When it reaches the position, it abuts against the abutting portion 361g and functions as a detent.

  The alignment wall portion 313f is a wall portion on which the end of the shaft member 340 opposite to the side on which the disk portion 342 is disposed can be brought into contact, and the axial direction of the shaft member 340 is caused by the contact. Is prevented from being displaced.

  In the present embodiment, the length from the inner wall of the accommodating portion 313a on the extended half shaft portion 313c side to the alignment wall portion 313f is within the plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the disk portion 342 of the shaft member 340, and the torsion spring 343. The length from the surface opposite to the side where the torsion spring is disposed to the end of the cylindrical portion 341 on the side where the torsion spring is disposed is equivalent. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the shaft member 340 from moving in the axial direction in the assembled state.

  That is, the alignment wall portion 313f can have both the effect as a reinforcing rib for increasing the rigidity of the cylindrical upper half 313 and the effect as a positioning portion for positioning the shaft member 340 in the axial direction.

  The front side wall portion 314 is a plate-like portion connected to the rear end portion of the cylindrical upper half portion 313, and includes notches 314a disposed in a pair in the front-rear direction at both left and right end portions. Since the notch 314a is a notch to which the upper arm 343b (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is locked, the tilting device 310 is biased in the rotational (tilting) direction from the torsion spring 343 via the notch 314a. Receive.

  The rear side wall portion 315 is a portion that abuts the abutting end surface 321b of the lower cover 320 on the surface, and a plurality of plate-shaped reinforcing plate portions that are disposed between the front side wall portion 314 and connected to the front side wall portion 314. 315a.

  The reinforcing plate portion 315a has a plurality of plate-like portions arranged side by side symmetrically, and the plate-like portions other than the plate-like portion disposed in the center are recessed support that is a recess for receiving and supporting the drive motor M1 on the lower surface. Part 315b. Accordingly, a plurality of small frame shapes are formed by the front side wall portion 314, the rear side wall portion 315, and the reinforcing plate portion 315a, so that the strength in the vicinity of the front side wall portion 314 and the rear side wall portion 315 of the pressing plate portion 312 is improved. Can do.

  The curved wall portion 316 is configured such that the central portion in the left-right direction protrudes outward from the cylindrical upper half 313 as compared to the outer portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 13B), and the rotating shaft ( That is, it is a plate-like portion that is curved in the vertical and horizontal directions and is formed in an arc shape centering on the center of the circle of the upper half portion 313 of the cylinder, and is curved along the vertical direction on the inner side surface (side surface on the rotating shaft side). A curved concave portion 316a is provided. The curved recess 316a is formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the sandwiched portion 351a of the bending member 350.

  The curved wall portion 316 includes, as outer peripheral surfaces thereof, a first peripheral surface 316b and a second peripheral surface 316c having different separation widths from the rotation axis O1 (see FIG. 19B).

  The first peripheral surface 316b is disposed in the vicinity of the center position in the left-right direction of the tilting device 310, and has the longest separation width from the rotation axis O1 (in the tilting device 310 in the arc around the rotation axis O1). It is formed as a peripheral surface (along the arc of the largest diameter included).

  The second circumferential surface 316c is disposed in the vicinity of both end positions in the left-right direction of the tilting device 310, and the separation width from the rotation axis O1 is shorter than that of the first circumferential surface 316b (a circular arc around the rotation axis O1). Of these, it is formed as a peripheral surface (along an arc having a shorter diameter than the arc of the maximum diameter included in the tilting device 310).

  Here, the reaction force applied when the player pushes and operates the tilting device 310 varies depending on how far the player's operation position is from the rotation axis O1. In other words, the farther the position where the player who performs the pushing operation touches the tilting device 310 is farther from the rotation axis O1, the smaller the reaction force applied to the player during the pushing operation (the principle of the lever).

  Therefore, compared with the case where the pressing operation is performed by touching the pressing plate portion 312 in the vicinity of the first peripheral surface 316b, the case where the pressing operation is performed by touching the pressing plate portion 312 in the vicinity of the second peripheral surface 316c. Since the reaction force given to the player can be increased, the player's different wishes can be fulfilled. That is, the player who wants to make the reaction force felt during operation as small as possible is prompted to operate the vicinity of the first circumferential surface 316b, and the player who wants to ensure a large reaction force felt during operation near the second circumferential surface 316c. By urging the player to operate the player, the same mechanism can fulfill the wishes of both players having different hopes, and therefore, part of the dissatisfaction caused by the players can be solved.

  The upper cover 311 includes a side wall portion 318 that connects the pressing plate portion 312 and the curved wall portion 316 from the side surface. The side wall portion 318 has a lower side surface formed in the same shape as the upper side surface of the side wall portion 323 of the lower cover 320 and is disposed at a position facing the side wall portion 323 in the vertical direction. The side wall portion 323 of the lower cover 320 can be positioned by bringing it into contact with each other in the vertical direction.

  Next, the lower cover 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a) is a front view of the lower cover 320, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the lower cover 320 taken along arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a lower cover. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view of the lower cover 320 taken along the line XIVd-XIVd in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the lower cover 320 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a plate-shaped reinforcing plate portion 321 that is inclined upward from the near side to the deep side, and the rear of the reinforcing plate portion 321. A curved wall portion 322 that curves and extends downward from the end portion, and a pair of plate-like side wall portions that extend downward from the left and right end portions of the reinforcing plate portion 321 and are connected to the curved wall portion 322 323, a front abutting wall portion 324 extending inward in the left-right direction from the front side end of the side wall portion 323, and a box connected to the front abutting wall portion 324 and open on the front side and the upper side And a motor support portion 325 formed in a shape.

  The reinforcing plate portion 321 has a shape (transferred shape) whose upper surface can be in close contact with the lower surface of the pressing plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) of the upper cover 311, and is thus fastened to the upper cover 311 in the vertical direction. The strength of the upper cover 311 can be reinforced by being fixed. Thereby, when the player gives a strong impact to the upper cover 311, it is possible to prevent the upper cover 311 from being damaged. The reinforcing plate portion 321 includes an overhanging portion 321a projecting upward in the central portion in the front-rear direction, a contact end surface 321b formed on an end surface near the front side left and right center position, and an inner side in the left and right sides near the front side end portion. And a recessed portion 321c that is recessed from the wall toward the left and right outwards.

  The overhang portion 321a is a portion that is visible to the player through the opening 312a (see FIG. 10) of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). The overhang portion 321a is formed from a light transmissive resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emission of the LED disposed on the upper surface of the decorative plate 363d through the overhang portion 321a.

  The abutting end surface 321b is disposed at a position where the abutting end surface 321b abuts the rear side wall portion 315 of the upper cover 311 on the surface in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the lower cover 320 can be reinforced by using the strength of the rear side wall portion 315.

  The recessed portion 321c is recessed to a position where it does not interfere with the drive motor M1 in a top view (viewed in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 14C) when the drive motor M1 is fitted into the recessed support portion 325b1. That is, the drive motor M1 can be slid in the vertical direction with respect to the lower cover 320 to pass through the recessed portion 321c, and the drive motor M1 can be fitted into the recessed support portion 325b1.

  Thus, when the drive motor M1 is fitted into the lower cover 320, the drive motor M! Therefore, it is possible to minimize the width of the pair of left and right drive motors M1 in the left-right direction (the weight members M1a can be moved closer to each other in the left-right direction).

  The curved wall portion 322 is formed in an arc shape centering on the same axis as the central axis of the curved shape of the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 (see FIG. 13A), and at each position in the left-right direction, The curved wall 316 is configured with a slightly smaller radius. Accordingly, the lower cover 320 can be accommodated in the upper cover 311 in a state where the curved wall portion 316 and the curved wall portion 322 are in close contact with each other.

  The curved wall portion 322 has a notch 322a cut in the vertical direction at the center position in the left-right direction, an enlarged opening 322b whose notch width is enlarged at the upper end portion of the notch 322a, and a lower end portion of the curved wall portion 322. And a retaining portion 322c for closing the notch 322a.

  The notch 322a is a gap through which the main body portion 351 of the bending member 350 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the size of the gap is slightly wider than the thickness of the main body portion 351. The enlarged opening 322b is an opening through which the comb-shaped portion 352 and the switching extending portion 353 of the bending member 350 are inserted, and the width in the left-right direction is the width in the left-right direction of the comb-shaped portion 352 and the switching extending portion 353 ( The projected length is made larger than the total width.

  The retaining portion 322c is a portion that prevents the bending member 350 (see FIG. 11) from falling off, and has a thickness slightly smaller than the fitting recess 351b so as to be fitted with the fitting recess 351b of the bending member 350. Consists of shapes.

  The side wall part 323 is provided with a notch 323a that is notched upward from the lower end on the front side end face. The notch 323a is disposed behind the notch 314a (see FIG. 11) of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), and the upper arm 343b (see FIG. 11) of the torsion spring 343 is similar to the notch 314a. It is inserted and locked.

  The side wall part 323 is formed from a light transmissive resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emission of the LED disposed on the decorative plate 363d through the side wall portion 323. Since the size of the side wall portion 323 exposed on the upper side of the upper case 370 changes as the pushing angle of the tilting device 310 changes in appearance (see FIG. 8), the side wall portion 323 can be emitted through the side wall portion 323. The amount of light emitted can be changed according to the angle of the tilting device 310. That is, as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position, the decorative plate 323d is disposed after the tilting device 310 is operated (until reaching the lowered position from the raised position). Of the light emitted from the LED, the amount of light visually recognized by the player through the side wall portion 323 can be reduced.

  The front abutting wall portion 324 is formed so as to be in contact with the front side wall portion 314 (see FIG. 13B) of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the front contact wall part 324 can be reinforced using the strength of the front side wall part 314.

  The motor support portion 325 is a portion where the drive motor M1 (see FIG. 10) is disposed. The motor support portion 325 extends upward from the left and right ends of the bottom plate portion 325a and the bottom plate portion 325a. A side wall portion 325b having a recessed support portion 325b1 that supports the end portion from below and a plate-like rear plate portion 325c that connects the bottom plate portion 325a and the side wall portion 325b are mainly provided.

  The drive motor M1 (see FIG. 10) is arranged at a position near the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, ie, the foremost end of the lower cover 320, so that the drive motor M1 is moved to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 10) when the tilting device 310 operates. 1), the distance of relative movement with respect to the lower case 360 (see FIG. 8) fixed to the lower case 360 can be kept short. Therefore, while the drive motor M1 is mounted on the moving tilting device 310, the degree of deformation of the wiring that supplies electricity to the driving motor M1 due to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be reduced. As a result, the deterioration of the wiring of the drive motor M1 can be delayed, so that the maintenance period can be extended.

  The bottom plate portion 325a includes an extending portion 325a1 extending in a plate shape vertically downward from the front side end portion, and a protruding rib 352a2 protruding in a downward rib shape from a position that divides the length in the left-right direction into four equal parts. Prepare mainly.

  The extended portion 325a1 is a plate-like portion formed in the left-right direction, and is an end portion on the front side of the action claw portion 332 in the assembled state of the upper cover 311, the lower cover 320, and the shaft cover 330. It engages with a front projecting portion 332a1 that is a portion projecting upward from the upper end of the portion 331a (see FIG. 19B). Therefore, even if a design error occurs such that the bottom plate part 325 of the lower cover 320 is separated from the front side wall part 314 of the upper cover 311 (a gap is left) in a state where the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 are fastened and fixed. When the action claw portion 332 is fastened and fixed to the upper cover 311, the extension portion 325a1 can be brought closer to the front side wall portion 314 side by engaging the front extension portion 332a1 of the action claw portion 332 with the extension portion 325a1. The generated design error can be absorbed. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the allowable range of design error between the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320.

  The protruding rib 325a2 is a rib-like portion formed in the front-rear direction that is disposed at an intermediate position between the adjacent action claw portions 332 in the assembled state, and is a portion that ensures the rigidity of the bottom plate portion 325a. In addition, between the adjacent projecting ribs 325a2, the acting claw portion 332 is disposed in a state of contacting the bottom plate portion 325a in the assembled state. Therefore, in the portion where the projecting rib 325a2 is not disposed, the acting claw By replacing the portion 332 with a rib, the rigidity of the bottom plate portion 325a can be ensured.

  The side wall part 325b faces the reinforcing plate part 315a arranged on the outermost side among the plurality of reinforcing plate parts 315a (see FIG. 13B) of the upper cover 311 in the vertical direction, and the reinforcing plate part 315a faces the reinforcing plate part 315a. The recessed support portion 315b and the recessed support portion 325b1 that are disposed are configured to be able to hold the drive motor M1.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 8), the rear plate portion 325c comes into contact with the rear side wall portion 315 (see FIG. 13B) of the upper cover 311. Thereby, a large resistance can be ensured when the motor support 325 receives an upward load (from the piston member 362a (see FIG. 20A), which will be described later). Large resistance can be secured when received).

  Next, a procedure for sandwiching the bending member 350 between the lower cover 320 and the upper cover 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a) to 15 (d) show a part of the tilting device 310 in the line corresponding to the XIVd-XIVd line in FIG. 14 (a), illustrating the procedure for covering the lower cover 320 with the upper cover 311 in time series. It is sectional drawing.

  15A shows a state in which the bending member 350 is inserted into the notch 322a of the lower cover 320, and in FIG. 15B, the upper cover 311 is bent from the state of FIG. 15A. FIG. 15C shows a state where the upper cover 311 has been lowered by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 15B, and FIG. FIG. 15 shows a state where the upper cover 311 is lowered from the state of FIG. 15C to a position where the upper cover 311 is fixed to the lower cover 320.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the assembly process, even if the fitting recess 351 b of the bending member 350 is not firmly fitted to the retaining portion 322 c (see FIG. 15A), the upper cover 311 is covered from that state, By lowering, the posture of the bending member 350 is changed in such a way that the sandwiched portion 351a of the bending member 350 becomes the shape of the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320 and the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 (FIG. 15B ) And FIG. 15 (c)), by lowering the upper cover 311, it is possible to form a state in which the fitting recess 351b of the bending member 350 is fitted in the retaining portion 322c (see FIG. 15 (d)). . Thereby, it becomes easy to perform the operation | work which fixes the bending member 350 between the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320, and can shorten work time.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 15D, the main body 351 of the bending member 350 has a width direction along the thickness direction of the bending wall 316 of the upper cover 311. Even when the thickness of the bending member 350 is small, the bending member 350 can be prevented from being deformed in the thickness direction. The upper end of the bending member 350 is brought into contact with the upper end surface of the bending recess 316a of the bending wall portion 316, so that the bending member 350 is prevented from moving in the vertical direction. It is fixed between the cover 320.

  When the upper cover 311 is further lowered from the state shown in FIG. 15D (when the upper cover 311 is partially destroyed by an excessive load, etc.), the bending member 350 is further pushed in, and the retaining portion of the lower cover 320 Although the bending member 350 may slide down when the 322c is folded, in this embodiment, the reinforcing plate portion 321 of the lower cover 320 and the pressing plate portion 312 of the upper cover 311 come into contact with each other, so that the lower cover 320 is contacted. Since the strength for maintaining the position of the upper cover 311 is improved, it is possible to prevent the retaining portion 322c from being broken.

  The shaft cover 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a top view of the shaft cover 330, FIG. 16 (b) is a front view of the shaft cover 330, and FIG. 16 (c) is a shaft cover taken along arrow XVIc in FIG. 16 (a). FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the shaft cover 330 has a cylindrical lower half 331 having a shape similar to that of the upper cylindrical half 313 (see FIG. 13B), and extends rearward from the lower cylindrical half 331. A plurality of action claw portions 332.

  The cylindrical lower half 331 is a portion having the central axis of the cylinder the same as the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, and a receiving portion 331a for receiving a torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10), A recessed portion 331b formed as a recessed portion having a semicircular cross section toward the center in the left-right direction of the half portion 331, and an inner peripheral surface having substantially the same shape (slightly larger radius) as the recessed portion 331b An extended half-shaft portion 331c extending in the shape of a half pipe toward the outside of the cylindrical lower half portion 331, and a fastening screw disposed at the center side of the cylindrical lower half portion 331 with respect to the recessed portion 331b. The insertion hole 331d to be inserted, the protruding contact portion 331e that is contacted with the protruding contact portion 361g of the lower case 360 in the circumferential direction when the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position, and the housing portion 331a It penetrates in the part on the recessed portion 331b side. It mainly includes a through hole 331f to be formed and a planar wall-shaped alignment wall portion 331g formed along a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 on the opposite side of the housing portion 331a across the recessed portion 331b. . The accommodating portion 331a, the recessed portion 331b, the extended half shaft portion 331c, the insertion hole 331d, and the overhanging contact portion 331e are equivalent to the configuration of the same name in the cylindrical upper half portion 313 (see FIG. 13B). Since this is the part, the description is omitted.

  The accommodating portion 331a forms a space in which the torsion spring 343 and the disc portion 342 of the shaft member 340 are accommodated. Since the disk part 342 is accommodated facing the extended half-shaft part 331c, the disk part 342 is axially contacted with the inner wall of the accommodating part 331a on the extended half-axis part 331c side (FIG. 16 (a)). ) Positional deviation in the horizontal direction) is prevented.

  On the other hand, the end of the shaft member 340 opposite to the side where the disk portion 342 is disposed is in contact with the alignment wall portion 331g, thereby preventing axial displacement.

  In the present embodiment, the length from the inner wall of the accommodating portion 331a on the extended half shaft portion 331c side to the alignment wall portion 331g is within the plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the disk portion 342 of the shaft member 340, and the torsion spring 343. The length from the surface opposite to the side where the torsion spring is disposed to the end of the cylindrical portion 341 on the side where the torsion spring is disposed is equivalent. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the shaft member 340 from moving in the axial direction in the assembled state.

  That is, the alignment wall portion 331g can have both an effect as a reinforcing rib that increases the rigidity of the cylindrical lower half portion 331 and an effect as a positioning portion that positions the shaft member 340 in the axial direction.

  The through hole 331f is a hole through which the lower arm 343a (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is inserted, and is formed over about 45 ° around the central axis of the circumference of the cylindrical lower half 331. Therefore, the torsion spring 343 can be torsionally deformed by displacing the lower arm 343 b of the torsion spring 343 inserted through the through hole 331 f outside the shaft cover 330.

  The action claw portion 332 is a plate-like portion in which a plurality (four in this embodiment) are provided in the left-right direction, and includes an upper end surface 332a having a planar shape and a lower end surface 332b having an arc shape. Prepare mainly.

  The upper end surface 332a is in contact with the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 325a (see FIG. 11) of the lower cover 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the resistance with respect to the bending deformation of the bottom plate part 325a of the lower cover 320 can be improved.

  The lower end surface 332b is a side surface that is in contact with the piston member 362a of the lower case 360, and the switching point 332c that is the lowest point in the state shown in FIG. 16C is the posture shown in FIG. When the end surface 332a comes into contact with the piston member 362a in a horizontal position), it is disposed on the central axis of the piston member 362a of the lower case 360 (see FIG. 20B). The lower end surface 332b includes a front arc portion 332d disposed on the front side of the switching point 332c and a rear arc portion 332e disposed on the rear side of the switching point 332c, and the front arc portion 332d. The rear arc portion 332e has an arc having the same radius.

  Note that a plurality (four in this embodiment) of the action claw portions 332 are connected in series, and each abuts against the piston member 362a (see FIG. 17) of the lower case 360, so that the piston is tilted when the tilting device 310 tilts. Since the load applied from the biasing device 362 (see FIG. 17) can be doubled (four times in this embodiment) based on the biasing force loaded from one member 362a, the amount of operation of the tilting device 310 is small. Even when the load is small, the amount of change in the load applied from the biasing device 362 can be increased.

  Further, even if one of the plurality of action claws 332 is broken due to an impact when operated by a player, for example, the remaining action claw 332 receives a load from the piston member 362a. Thus, the game can be continued as usual. Therefore, the maintenance period of the tilting device 310 can be set longer.

  Next, the lower case 360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is an exploded top perspective view of the lower case 360, and FIG. 18 is an exploded bottom perspective view of the lower case 360. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the lower case 360 includes a bottom receiving member 361 that is formed in a dish-like shape with the top open, and is assembled to the bottom receiving member 361 from below and the bottom receiving member 361. An urging device 362 having a piston member 362a configured to be movable in the thickness direction (vertical direction), and a power operating device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and supplied with power are collectively arranged. Is mainly provided.

  The bottom receiving member 361 includes a recessed bearing portion 361a that is recessed in a semicircular shape whose upper side is opened at both left and right end portions of the front side end portion, and a left-right direction in the lower rear side of the central axis of the recessed bearing portion 361a. A strip-shaped projecting portion 361b that extends in a strip shape and projects upward, and a tubular receiver that extends in a tubular shape in the vertical direction behind the strip-shaped projecting portion 361b and has a bottom formed in it. A portion 361c, a cut portion 361d that is a cut formed along the front-rear direction on a lid plate that acts as a lid that blocks movement of the piston member 362a at the upper end of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c, and a concave bearing portion 361a A receiving surface 361e formed as a U-shaped flat surface inclined obliquely downward from the rear, a base portion 361f on which the power action device 363 is placed, and a rising position of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 8). There mainly comprises a protruding contact portion 361g abuts at the projecting contact portion 313e and the circumferential direction of the tilting device 310, a rubber plate GR1 to be placed in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the receiving surface 361e, the by.

  The concave bearing portion 361a is a concave portion that pivotally supports the tilting device 310 by sandwiching the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 9) together with the upper case 370, and has a semicircular shape having a slightly larger radius than the ring member BR1. The

  The band-shaped projecting portion 361b is a protrusion to which the lower arm 343a (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is locked. Thereby, when the tilting device 310 is operated from the raised position to the lowered position, the torsion spring 343 is wound, and the urging force that moves the tilting device 310 toward the raised position increases.

  The cylindrical receiving portion 361c is a cylindrical portion into which the piston member 362a of the urging device 362 is fitted, and extends in the vertical direction, and a plurality (four in this embodiment) are arranged on the left and right sides. Established.

  The notch portion 361d is formed with a width (a width slightly larger than the width of the action claw portion 332) that can receive the action claw portion 332 (see FIG. 10) of the tilting device 310, and the central portion thereof is the biasing device 362. The piston member 362a is recessed with an outer shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the hemispherical portion. Therefore, both the piston member 362a and the action claw portion 332 can be aligned (suppression of misalignment) by the cut portion 361d. Thereby, when the pushing amount of the tilting device 310 becomes large, the piston member 362a of the biasing device 362 and the action claw portion 332 of the tilting device 310 are displaced in the left-right direction (axial direction of the tilting device 310). This can be suppressed.

  The receiving surface 361e is a portion that is disposed to face the bottom wall portion 317 (see FIG. 10) when the tilting device 310 is disposed at the lowered position. Under normal conditions, even if an impact occurs when the tilting device 310 is placed in the lowered position (even if it is moved to the lowered position at a high speed), the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the rubber plate GR1. As a result, the shock is absorbed, so that the tilting device 310 is prevented from being damaged (in this case, a gap is formed between the receiving surface 361e and the bottom wall portion 317). On the other hand, when the rubber plate GR1 is worn, even if sufficient shock absorption is not performed, the tilting device 310 is moved to the lowered position because the receiving surface 361e comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310. It is possible to reduce the impact (pressure) received by the tilting device when it reaches.

  The base part 361f mainly includes a rectangular opening 361f1 and a wall-shaped positioning wall part 361f2 projecting upward from three sides excluding the front side among the four sides defining the upper surface.

  Through the opening 361f1, an electrical wiring for supplying power to the power operation device 363 is inserted. In the assembled state, the bottom receiving member 361 has no opening other than the opening 361f1 (the cylindrical receiving portion 361c, which is the main opening, is closed by the bottom lid member 362c).

  Therefore, for example, even if a player accidentally pours a beverage into the operation device 300, the beverage can be temporarily stored in a portion (peripheral portion) excluding the base portion 361f. Can be prevented from dripping.

  The positioning wall portion 361f2 is formed in an arrangement along the outer shape of the bottom surface of the main body member 363a in the assembled state. Therefore, when the main body member 363a is assembled to the base portion 361f, positioning can be performed by pressing the main body member 363a against the positioning wall portion 361f2, so that the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

  The base portion 361f is formed as a base portion that protrudes upward from the bottom plate of the bottom receiving member 361. In the assembled state, the tilting device 310 is covered from above. Therefore, even if a player accidentally pours a beverage into the operation device 300, the beverage travels along the top surface of the tilting device 310 and enters the inside of the bottom receiving member 361 (in the vicinity) excluding the base portion 361f. And can be prevented from falling directly on the upper surface of the base 361f. In this case, it is possible to prevent the beverage from being applied to the upper surface of the base part 361f before the beverage is stored by the height of the base part 361f. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the beverage enters the inside of the opening 361f1 and enters the interior of the pachinko machine 10 through the wiring such as the harness.

  In the assembled state, the positioning wall portion 361f2 and the three sides of the bottom surface of the main body member 363a are in close contact with each other, and the upper surface of the base portion 361f and the bottom surface of the main body member 363a are in close contact with each other. Thereby, possibility that a drink will permeate between the upper surface of pedestal 361f and the lower surface of power operation device 363 can be made low.

  In the present embodiment, the wiring such as a harness that connects the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 is configured in a manner that it cannot communicate with the operation device 300 unless it passes through the opening 361f1. Therefore, when a wire or the like enters the pachinko machine 10 or the like from the gap of the operation device 300, it is necessary to enter a bent path as in the case of the beverage path described above, which increases the difficulty of fraud. Since it can, fraud can be easily prevented.

  The biasing device 362 is a device that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 10) through the action claw portion 332, and is supported on the inner side of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c so as to be operable in the vertical direction and is opened downward. A bottomed cylindrical piston member 362a, a coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. And a bottom cover member 362c fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 in a manner of covering the side opening.

  The piston member 362a is configured with a hemispherical upper tip and an upper half with an outer shape that can pass through the cut 361d, while a lower half with a larger outer shape than the cut 361d. The passage of the piston member 362a is prevented. Further, the lower half portion is formed with a rib having a semicircular cross section that protrudes from the central axis toward the eight sides and extends in the vertical direction, so that the piston member 362a is supported by the cylindrical receiving portion 361c. Thus, the frictional force applied to the piston member 362a from the cylindrical receiving portion 361c can be reduced by reducing the contact area between the piston member 362a and the cylindrical receiving portion 361c while maintaining the action of maintaining the posture. .

  In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b is accommodated in the cylindrical receiving portion 361c in a state in which the coil spring 362b is contracted in advance from the natural length in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Therefore, when no load is applied from the action claw portion 322, the piston member 362a is disposed at the rising end position (position where the movement of the piston member 362a is blocked by the notch portion 361d) by the biasing force of the coil spring 362b.

  The power action device 363 is placed on the base portion 361f of the bottom receiving member 361 and has a cup-shaped main body member 363a configured such that the upper end surface is inclined upward from the near side to the back, and the main body member 363a. A right sensor fixing plate 363b that is an electronic board that is inserted into a notch formed in the rear wall from the upper end downward and is fastened and fixed to a plate portion that extends rearward of the main body member 363a, and the right sensor On the opposite side of the fixed plate 363b, the left sensor fixed plate 363c, which is an electronic board fastened and fixed to a plate portion extending rearward of the main body member 363a in the same manner as the right sensor fixed plate 363b, and the upper side of the main body member 363a A decorative plate 363d, which is an electronic board that is fixed to the end face and is provided with an illumination device such as an LED, and a position formed in a plate shape on the front side of the power application device 363 And the eye plate 363e, a mainly includes.

  The main body member 363a includes an opening 363a1 opened in the bottom plate, an upper ceiling 363a2 that is an upper surface portion of the front and rear wall surfaces, a lower ceiling portion 363a3 that is an upper surface portion of the left and right wall surfaces, and an upper end of the rear wall surface downward. A pair of recessed portions 363a4 that are recessed in a groove shape, and a plane that runs along the inner wall of the pair of recessed portions 363a4 near the other recessed portion 363a4 and that is perpendicular to the rotation axis O1. A pair of plate-like fixing plates 363a5 extending in parallel to the back side, an alignment projection 363a6 projecting straight from the lower ceiling portion 363a3 at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the lower ceiling portion 363a3, and a body member 363a It mainly includes a wiring guide portion 363a7 formed in a cup shape whose front and upper sides are opened on the left and right outer sides.

  The opening 363a1 is a portion serving as a through hole into which an electrical wiring such as a harness is inserted from below the base 361f. The electric wiring is connected to the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c and the decoration plate 363d, whereby electric power can be supplied to the sensors S1 to S3 and the LEDs arranged on the decoration plate 363d.

  The lower ceiling 363a3 is formed slightly lower (about 1 mm) than the upper ceiling 363a2 (a step is formed between the upper ceiling 363a2 and the lower ceiling 363a3). Since the decorative plate 363d is fastened and fixed to the main body member 363a so as to contact the upper ceiling portion 363a2 in the assembled state, a slight gap can be formed between the decorative plate 363d and the lower ceiling portion 363a3. This gap can be used as a path for electrical wiring such as a harness or an air path for suppressing heat generation of the decorative plate 363d.

  The recessed portion 363a4 is formed with a width that allows the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c to be inserted in the assembled state, and the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c do not protrude from the upper ceiling portion 363a2 (the decorative plate 363d and It is formed with a depth that does not abut).

  The fixing plate 363a5 is a plate member that comes into contact with the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c inserted into the recessed portion 363a4 and to which the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c are fastened and fixed.

  The alignment protrusion 363a6 is a protrusion that is inserted into the alignment hole 363d1 of the decorative plate 363d and aligns the decorative plate 363d with the main body member 363a.

  The wiring guide portion 363a7 is a support portion that prevents wiring such as a harness from hanging down. Wiring such as a harness connected to the drive motor M1 extends in the left-right direction below the positioning plate 363e, and then passes through the inside of the wiring guide portion 363a7 toward the main body member 363a or the decorative plate 363d.

  For example, when going to the main body member 363a, it passes through the gap between the decorative plate 363d and the lower ceiling 363a3 and is inserted into the main body member 363a, and when going to the decorative plate 363d, the decorative plate 363d Are electrically connected to each other by a method such as soldering or connector connection.

  On the right sensor fixing plate 363b, a photocoupler type first sensor S1 and a second sensor S2 are vertically arranged in a rear end portion. On the left sensor fixing plate 363c, a photocoupler-type third sensor S3 is disposed at a position facing the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2. Each sensor S1 to S3 is disposed outside the main body member 363a in the assembled state.

  The first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are sensors that detect the orientation and position of the tilting device 310 by detecting the passage of the protruding portion 352a (see FIG. 10) of the bending member 350, and the third sensor S3 This is a sensor for detecting the operation state of the tilting device 310 (pushing or striking operation or pedal operation for detecting the pushing amount) by detecting the passage of the protruding portion 353a (see FIG. 10) of the bending member 350. In the following, an operation that does not have a difference in detection depending on the pushing amount, such as a continuous hitting operation, is referred to as a “push operation”, and an operation that detects the pushing amount is referred to as a “pedal operation”. In particular, the push operation includes a case where the tilting device 310 returns before reaching the piston member 362a, and the pedal operation includes a case where the tilting device 310 tilts while pushing the piston member 362a.

  In addition, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and includes a gap (slit) into which a portion to be detected can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

  The right sensor fixing plate 363b includes a connector receiving portion 363b1 into which a connector such as a harness is inserted at the front side end portion. Electricity is sent from the connector receiving portion 363b1 to the sensors S1 and S2 via the right sensor fixing plate 363b. The connector receiving portion 363b1 is housed inside the main body member 363a in the assembled state. Accordingly, the harness or the like can be inserted into the connector receiving portion 363b1 without taking it out of the main body member 363a.

  The left sensor fixing plate 363c includes a connector receiving portion 363c1 into which a connector such as a harness is inserted at the front side end portion. Electricity is sent from the connector receiving portion 363c1 to the third sensor S3 via the left sensor fixing plate 363c. The connector receiving portion 363c1 is housed inside the main body member 363a in the assembled state. Accordingly, the harness or the like can be inserted into the connector receiving portion 363c1 without taking it out of the main body member 363a.

  The decorative plate 363d includes a pair of alignment holes 363d1 that are through holes through which the alignment protrusions 363a6 are inserted.

  The positioning plate 363e is a plate-like portion that is formed so as to be curved and hang down from the front side wall of the main body member 363a. By arranging wiring such as a harness in the space behind the positioning plate 363e, the harness protrudes between the piston member 362a disposed on the opposite side via the positioning plate 363e and the action claw portion 332, and the operation is performed. It can be prevented from being caught sometimes. This will be described in detail below.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 19), the drive motor M1 is disposed directly above the piston member 362a and the action claw portion 332. Therefore, if the wiring of the harness or the like connected to the drive motor M1 is hung down as it is, the clearance between the piston member 362a and the action claw portion 332 when the wiring of the harness or the like is bent during the tilting operation of the tilting device 310. There is a risk of intrusion.

  On the other hand, if the wiring of the harness or the like passes through the lower side of the positioning plate 363e left and right and then moves toward the main body, the position of the wiring of the harness or the like when the tilting device 310 tilts (the length of the wiring) The center position of the head and the portion that hangs under the influence of gravity can be arranged on the rear side of the positioning plate 363e. In this case, even if the wiring such as the harness is bent and deformed, the deformed portion is stopped by the positioning plate 363e, so that the deformed portion is prevented from entering the gap between the piston member 362a and the action claw portion 332. it can.

  Thereby, the assembly | attachment operation | work of wiring, such as a harness, can be simplified. That is, since the positioning plate 363e can restrict the movement range of the wiring such as the harness, the number of fixing members such as a binding band for fixing the wiring such as the harness to the lower case 360 can be minimized and assembled. It is possible to prevent the work from becoming complicated.

  Further, when wiring such as a harness is hung vertically downward from the main body side of the drive motor M1, the piston member 362a and the action claw portion 322 are disposed avoiding a position where there is a possibility of interference when the wiring is bent. In this embodiment, since the movement range of the wiring such as the harness can be restricted by the positioning plate 363e in this embodiment, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the action claw portion 322 can be improved (at the left and right end portions). The action nail | claw part 322 can be arrange | positioned).

  The positioning plate 363e rises and slopes as the lower surface approaches the left and right ends in the vicinity of the left and right ends. That is, the vicinity of the left and right center position extends long downward, and the extension length is short near the left and right end positions. Thereby, since the volume of the material required for the positioning plate 363e can be cut, the material cost can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, since the length of the wiring such as the harness is set so that the vicinity of both the left and right end positions is shifted from the center position of the wiring such as the harness, the movement of the wiring such as the harness is excessively moved near the left and right end positions. Even if it does not restrict | limit, it can prevent that wiring, such as a harness, penetrate | invades in the clearance gap between the piston member 362a and the action nail | claw part 332. Therefore, by chamfering the positioning plate 363e in the vicinity of the left and right end positions as in the present embodiment, the wiring such as the harness is combined with the piston member 362a and the action claw portion while suppressing an excessive burden on the wiring. It is also possible to ensure the effect of preventing entry into the gap between 332.

  Next, the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19A is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 19B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XIXb-XIXb in FIG. 19A. 19A and 19B show a state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position. The XIXb-XIXb line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of a predetermined piston member 362a of the lower case 360.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the lower arm 343a of the torsion spring 343 abuts on the belt-like convex portion 361b of the lower case 360 in a state where the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position. And locked. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward (tilting operation) from the raised position, the torsion spring 343 is wound, and the urging force by the torsion spring 343 increases in proportion to the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310. To do.

  In the relationship between the bending member 350 and each of the sensors S1 to S3, the recessed portions 352b and 353b (see FIG. 10) of the bending member 350 are arranged in the region between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit at the raised position. In all the sensors S1 to S3, the light emitted from the light projecting unit reaches the light receiving unit. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is tilted, any one of the sensors S1 to S3 is configured to be shielded from light so that the light projecting unit irradiates all the sensors S1 to S3. If the state where the light reaches the light receiving unit is detected, it can be detected that the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position.

  Next, the tilting operation (rotating operation) of the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20A, 20B, 21A, and 21B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XIXb-XIXb in FIG. 19A.

  20A shows a state where the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 3 °) from the state shown in FIG. 19B, and FIG. 20B shows the state shown in FIG. A state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 7 °, about 10 ° from the raised position) from the state shown in a) is shown, and in FIG. 21 (a), it is shown in FIG. 20 (b). The state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 10 °, about 20 ° from the ascending position) is illustrated, and in FIG. 21B, the tilting device is moved from the state illustrated in FIG. The state where 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 4 °, about 24 ° from the raised position) and is arranged at the lowered position is illustrated. Further, for easy understanding, the action claw portion 322 and the piston member 362a are partially enlarged and illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the raised position, the lower end surface of the action claw portion 332 starts to contact the piston member 362a. Therefore, the load felt by the player via the tilting device 310 is the sum of the urging force of the torsion spring 343 and the urging force of the coil spring 362b.

  In the present embodiment, since the coil spring 362b is disposed on the cylindrical receiving portion 361c in a state where the coil spring 362b is contracted by a predetermined amount from the natural length, the load applied from the coil spring 362b to the action claw portion 332 is from the start of contact. Since it is large, the rate of change of the load felt by the player suddenly increases (see FIG. 22).

  Therefore, the player can feel that the state of the operation device 300 has changed at a position where the load applied via the tilting device 310 changes rapidly. In the present embodiment, the state between FIG. 19B and FIG. 20A is the push operation state, and the state between FIG. 20A and FIG. 21B is the pedal operation state. As configured.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 20 (a), a push operation (push-in operation or continuous hitting operation) can be performed up to a position where the load suddenly increases, and further against the sudden increase in load. The pedal can be operated by pushing it in. Therefore, a single operation of tilting the tilting device 310 can be performed separately as a push operation and a pedal operation, and each operation method is switched using the load applied to the player from the tilting device 310 as a mark. Therefore, it is possible to switch each operation method intuitively (using a feeling of pushing), not through a visual operation such as changing the operation method while looking at the scale.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the lower end surface 332b of the action claw 332 is pulled from the rotation axis O1 and rearward from a straight line N1 passing through the contact point between the action claw 332 and the piston member 362a (FIG. 20 (a). ) It is configured to rise upward toward the right).

  Therefore, for example, compared with the case where the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is formed along the straight line N1, the amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b with respect to the tilt angle of the tilt device 310 can be reduced. When the pushing amount of 310 is large (see FIGS. 21A and 21B), it is possible to suppress the displacement amount of the torsion spring 343 from becoming excessively large.

  Here, as it goes from FIG. 20A to FIG. 21B, the contact point of the action claw portion 332 with respect to the piston member 362a moves away from the rotation axis O1, so that, for example, the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is a straight line N1. When the tilting device 310 tilts at a predetermined angle, the vertical displacement of the contact point increases and the amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b increases, so that the displacement from the piston member 362a is applied to the action claw portion 332. Load increases.

  In this case, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in with a large displacement speed, the amount of change in the load applied to the acting claw portion 332 from the piston member 362a increases abruptly as it approaches the pushing end, and the acting claw portion 332 There is a risk of damage.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is inclined upward (inclined in a direction away from the piston member 362a) toward the rear, so that the displacement speed of the tilting device 310 is large. Even when the pushing operation is performed, the speed at which the coil spring 362b is displaced can be reduced. Thereby, it can suppress that the variation | change_quantity of the load given to the action nail | claw part 322 from the piston member 362a becomes large rapidly.

  Further, since the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is formed in an arc shape and the tip of the piston member 362a is formed in a hemispheric shape, the contact mode can be maintained as point contact, and the action claw portion 332 and the piston member 362a. The frictional force generated between the two can be reduced. Thereby, when the action nail | claw part 332 tilts, it can prevent that the load which causes the piston member 362a to fall sideways (falling down in the front-back direction) arises.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the action claw portion 332 is inserted into the cut portion 361d of the lower case 360 in a state where the tilting device 310 is tilted by 20 ° from the raised position. For this reason, the tip of the piston member 362a has a hemispherical shape, and the action claw portion 332 is formed with a width thinner than the diameter of the piston member 362a, and the action claw portion 332 is in the left-right direction (FIG. 21A). Even if it is easy to shift with respect to the piston member 362a, the movement of the action claw portion 332 in the left-right direction can be suppressed by stopping the cut portion 361d. Thereby, the urging force generated according to the displacement of the coil spring 362b can be reliably loaded on the action claw portion 332 via the piston member 362.

  Note that the separation width of the cut portion 361d is formed smaller than that of the present embodiment, or a buffer member is provided on the side surface of the cut portion 361d, and the action claw portion 332 is sandwiched by the cut portion 361d to apply a frictional force. You may do it. In this case, the load received by the player when the action claw portion 332 enters the notch 361d can be rapidly changed, so that the action claw portion 332 and the piston member 362a shown in FIG. It can be formed as a position that becomes a mark next to the position where contact starts (a plurality of load boundary positions can be provided).

  As shown in FIG. 21B, when the tilting device 310 is disposed at the lowered position, the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the rubber plate GR1, thereby absorbing the impact at the time of stopping. A profound feeling can be produced.

  Here, a method for detecting the posture, the operation direction, and the operation speed of the tilting device 310 will be described. Each sensor S1-S3 (refer FIG. 17) is when the convex part 352a, 353a of the bending member 350 is not interposed between the light projection part and light-receiving part of each sensor S1-S3 (it is not light-shielded). Is turned on and turned off when the projecting portions 352a and 353a of the bending member 350 are interposed (light-shielded) between the light projecting portions and the light receiving portions of the sensors S1 to S3.

  As described above, since the sensors S1 to S3 are turned on in a state where the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position, the counter is corrected (zero) when the sensors S1 to S3 are turned on. Control).

  When the tilting device 310 is up to 3 ° from the raised position, the second sensor S2 is turned off, the third sensor S3 is kept on, and the first sensor S1 is switched between on and off. In the present embodiment, the state in which the third sensor S3 is on is controlled as a section for the push operation. For this reason, the push-in operation and the continuous hitting operation are detected by detecting the number of times and the speed at which the first sensor S1 is switched on and off while the third sensor S3 remains on.

  When the tilting device 310 is tilted at an angle larger than 3 ° from the ascending position, the third sensor S3 is turned off. In this embodiment, the state in which the third sensor S3 is off is controlled as a pedal operation section. After the third sensor S3 is turned off, the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is detected according to the switching time of the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2, and the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 The operation direction of the tilting device 310 (in which direction it is operating) is detected based on the rising timing of the pulse signal, and further, the distance calculated from these operating speeds and the operation direction are counted to determine the direction of the tilting device 310. The current posture is detected. This makes it possible to associate the degree of tilting of the tilting device 310 with the effect.

  With reference to FIG. 22, the load felt by the player when the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 8) is tilted will be described. FIG. 22 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 310 with respect to the tilting angle from the rising position of the tilting device 310. In the graph shown in FIG. 22, the horizontal axis indicates the tilt angle in a state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the raised position (FIG. 19B is the left end, and increases from there to the right). The load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is the torsion spring 343 (until the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the raised position (see FIG. 20A)). The angle rises at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant of FIG.

  A biasing force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b is applied to the tilting device 310 via the piston member 362a (see FIG. 20A) with the tilting device 310 tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. .

  Since the coil spring 362b is disposed in a state where the coil spring 362b is preliminarily contracted from the natural length in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), the load felt by the player is at a position where the tilting device 310 tilts by 3 ° from the raised position. Changes rapidly (load change rate changes). In the present embodiment, the control is switched between the push operation and the pedal operation with this position as a boundary, so that the player can change the operation method using the rapid load change (the rapid change in the load change rate) as a mark. Switching can be easily performed.

  As described above, when the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is formed by a surface along the straight line N1 (see FIG. 20A), the displacement of the piston member 362a is increased as the tilt angle of the tilt device 310 increases. The ratio (the amount of displacement of the piston member 362a with respect to the tilt angle of the tilt device 310) increases.

  Therefore, the amount of increase added to the biasing force of the torsion spring 343 of the load applied to the tilting device 310 is increased along a predetermined quadratic function as the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 increases, so that the broken line D1 As shown, as the load applied to the tilting device 310 increases (the right side of the graph in FIG. 22), the rate of change of the load with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 increases. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is tilted at a high speed, the load (impact) applied from the piston member 362a to the action claw 332 increases as the tilt angle increases from the ascending position, and the durability of the action claw 332 is increased. May be reduced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 has an arc shape that rises and slopes toward the rear (see FIG. 20B), the displacement of the piston member 362a can be suppressed. And an increase in load can be suppressed in the manner indicated by the correction curve T1. Thereby, the load (impact) given to the action nail | claw part 332 can be suppressed. The durability of the action claw portion 332 can be improved.

  In addition, since there are a plurality of action claws 332 (four in this embodiment) (see FIG. 10), the action claws 332 per one while maintaining a large load felt by the player via the tilting device 310. The applied load can be suppressed. Thereby, both the objective of changing the player's feeling of operation and the objective of improving the durability of the action claw portion 332 can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor M1 that vibrates the tilting device 310 is disposed directly above the urging device 362 with the tilting device 310 disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 21B). Thereby, the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1 can be weakened by the buffering action of the coil spring 362b before being transmitted to the bottom receiving member 361.

  Therefore, the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10, and the front frame of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from vibrating. Therefore, even if the player is touching the front frame, the internal state of the operation device 300 (whether the drive motor M1 is operating) cannot be grasped. It is possible to prevent the willingness to operate to be reduced by knowing the internal state of.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 310 is disposed on the front side. Therefore, when it is desired to increase the operation of the vibration effect of the tilting device 310 by the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1, it is desirable that the drive motor M1 is disposed near the rotation axis O1. As a result, the driving sound can be easily heard by the player, and the player can easily notice the operation of the driving motor M1.

  On the other hand, the vicinity of the rotation axis O1 is also a position where the amount of movement of the tilting device 310 is small, so that there is little space and it is difficult to arrange wiring such as a harness well. In particular, care must be taken when there is a member that may pinch a wiring such as a harness.

  That is, when the drive motor M1 is arranged near the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 310, there is a problem that it is difficult to arrange the wiring such as a harness so as not to be sandwiched. On the other hand, in this embodiment, wirings, such as a harness, are once arrange | positioned in the aspect which passes the back side of the positioning board 363e to the left and right. As a result, the position where the bending amount of the wiring such as the harness is maximized by the operation of the tilting device 310 and the contact portion between the piston member 362e and the action claw portion 332 that may pinch the wiring such as the harness are positioned. It can be partitioned with a plate 363e. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent wiring such as a harness from being sandwiched between the piston member 362e and the action claw portion 332.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the load felt by the player is increased by operating the tilting device 310 by the pedal, but the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment is predetermined when the tilting device 2310 is operated by the pedal. A case will be described in which the outer shape of the action claw portion 2332 and the piston member 2362a of the tilting device 2310 is formed in a manner in which the load felt by the player is constant with the posture of. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 23 is an exploded top perspective view of the tilting device 2310 according to the second embodiment. 23 shows a state in which the left drive motor M1 and the left switching operation member 2326 are attached to the lower cover 2320, and the right drive motor M1 and the right switching operation member 2326 are separated from the lower cover 2320. The switching operation member 2326 is enlarged and illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 2310 includes a through hole 2325a1 in which the bottom plate portion 2325a of the motor support portion 2325 of the lower cover 2320 is drilled in the vertical direction, and switching that is inserted into the through hole 2325a1 so as to be vertically movable. An operation member 2326.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the switching operation member 2326 is disposed in the gap between the adjacent action claw portions 2332 and projects from the body member 2326a integrally molded from a resin material, and over the body member 2326a. And a swinging member 2326b that is pivotally supported so as to be swingable.

  The main body member 2326a has a contact plate portion 2326a1 formed in a plate shape elongated in the front-rear direction, and a thin plate shape that protrudes from the upper end portion of the contact plate portion 2326a1 while tilting downward and acts as a plate spring. The plate spring acting portion 2326a2, the housing recess 2326a3 that is a recess for housing the swinging member 2326b tilting back and forth, and the contact plate portion 2326a1 projecting outward from the intermediate position and are thin enough to bend and deform. It mainly includes a retaining portion 2326a4 configured.

  The housing recess 2326a3 is a mode in which the wall portion on the front side (left side in FIG. 23) rises along the vertical direction, and the wall portion on the back side (right side in FIG. 23) is displaced toward the back (right side in FIG. 23). Be inclined. Thereby, the tilting toward the front side from the posture in which the swinging member 2326b stands along the vertical direction is restricted, and the tilting toward the back is allowed.

  The retaining portion 2326a4 is displaceable in a direction close to the contact plate portion 2326a1, and is accommodated inside the maximum width of the contact plate portion 2326a1 when pressed against the contact plate portion 2326a1. There is a recess for receiving the retaining portion 2326a4 on the side surface of the contact plate portion 2326a1). Accordingly, if the width of the through hole 2325a1 is slightly larger than the width of the contact plate 2326a1, the switching operation due to the retaining portion 2326a4 is caused when the switching operation member 2326 is inserted into the through hole 2325a1 from above. The member 2326 can be prevented from clogging the through hole 2325a1, and after the switching operation member 2326 is inserted and partitioned, the retaining member 2326a4 can prevent the switching operation member 2326 from coming out of the through hole 2325a1. it can.

  The swinging member 2326b is a rod-like member having a rotation shaft along the thickness direction of the main body member 2326a, and is biased by a spring member (not shown) toward the front wall portion of the housing recess 2326a3. The That is, the state shown in FIG. 23 is an initial position of the swinging member 2326b (a position where no external load is generated), and the overhang length from the main body member 2326a is maximized at the initial position.

  The operation of the switching operation member 2326 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. FIGS. 24A to 24C and FIGS. 25A to 25C are partial sectional views of the tilting device 2310 and the lower case 2360. FIG. FIGS. 24A to 24C and FIGS. 25A to 25C illustrate a state where the tilting device 2310 is disposed at the lowered position.

  In FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), the switching operation member 2326 is viewed in cross section on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the drive motor M1, and the tilting device 2310 is viewed. Is shown in the lowered position (the vertical direction in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c) is the direction inclined from the vertical direction). )

  24A to 24C, the state in which the weight member M1a is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 24 by the driving force of the driving motor M1 is illustrated in time series. That is, in FIG. 24A, the state before the weight member M1a contacts the swinging member 2326b is shown in FIG. 24B. In FIG. 24B, the weight member M1a is moved after the weight member M1a contacts the swinging member 2326b. FIG. 24 (c) shows a state in which the maximum angle is rotated clockwise, in which the weight member M1a is separated from the swinging member 2326b and the swinging member 2326b is returned to the initial position.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c), when the weight member M1a rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 24, the displacement of the swinging member 2326b falls within the range of the recess of the housing recess 2326a3. Therefore, the main body member 2326a does not move up and down, and the arrangement of the switching operation member 2326 is maintained.

  25 (a) to 25 (c), the state in which the weight member M1a is rotated clockwise in FIG. 25 by the driving force of the driving motor M1 is illustrated in time series. That is, in FIG. 25A, the state before the weight member M1a contacts the swinging member 2326b is shown in FIG. 25B, and in FIG. 25B, the weight member M1a is moved after the weight member M1a contacts the swinging member 2326b. FIG. 25C shows a state where a load in a direction to rotate counterclockwise is applied, and a state where the weight member M1a is separated from the swinging member 2326b.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), when the weight member M1a rotates clockwise in FIG. 25, the swinging member 2326b is pressed against the wall surface on the front side of the housing recess 2326a3 to rotate. Therefore, the interference between the weight member M1a and the swinging member 2326b is avoided by the downward movement of the switching operation member 2326. That is, the switching operation member 2326 vibrates in the vertical direction in accordance with the rotation of the weight member M1a.

  In the present embodiment, when the switching operation member 2326 is disposed at the initial position, the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 is not in contact with the bottom receiving member 361 of the lower case 2360 (see FIG. 25A), and the weight member In a state where M1a pushes down the switching operation member 2326, the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 is brought into contact with the bottom receiving member 361 (see FIG. 25B).

  In this embodiment, the separation width between the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 in FIG. 25A is the vertical movement width of the switching operation member 2326 (FIG. 25A and FIG. 25B). The shape of the main body member 2326a is designed to be shorter than the displacement of the switching operation member 2326 between

  Therefore, when the state changes from FIG. 25A to FIG. 25B, pressure is applied to the bottom receiving member 361 from the switching operation member 2326, and the reaction force is applied in a direction to push the drive motor M1 upward. A load is applied to the upper cover 311 that presses the drive motor M1 from above.

  Therefore, in a state where the tilting device 2310 is pushed down to the lowered position, the player can feel a load repeatedly generated due to the vibration of the switching operation member 2326. The repeatedly generated load can be felt by the player by pushing down to the lowered position. For example, the tilting device 2310 switches the separation width between the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361. When the posture is longer than the vertical movement width of the member 2326, the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 do not come into contact with each other, so that the player is not repeatedly subjected to a load.

  Therefore, the player can recognize that the tilting device 2310 can be pushed down to the lowered position by feeling a repeatedly generated load. As a result, it is possible to prevent an operation error caused by a shortage of the push-in amount, an excessive push-up (excessive push-in amount) caused by the target position becoming ambiguous.

  Further, even when the tilting device 2310 is disposed at the lowered position and the drive motor M1 is rotated, there are cases where the switching operation member 2326 is oscillating and not depending on the rotation direction.

  Here, at the timing at which the pachinko machine 10 requests the operation of the operation device 2300, other actors (for example, arranged around the third symbol display device 81 and started inward as an effect) There is a case where the driving device of the accessory to be moved out is driven to the operation start position (the operation may be prepared). Usually, when the lottery result is a win, other actors move violently, and when the lottery result is off, the other actors remain stopped, but due to motor drive noise and vibration during operation preparation, There is a problem in that the player knows the lottery result without waiting for the production of other actors, thereby reducing the interest of the player.

  Therefore, even in the operation device 2300, the lottery result can be predicted by the driving sound and vibration of the drive motor M1, and the significance of operating the tilting device 2310 is weakened, and the player may stop performing the operation. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor M1 is similarly rotated in both the states shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the same drive sound and vibration are generated, while the drive motor M1 is rotated. Whether the switching operation member 2326 contacts the bottom receiving member 361 is changed depending on the direction. The displacement of the tilting device 2310 caused by the switching operation member 2326 coming into contact with the bottom receiving member 361 is slight, and it is difficult to visually confirm whether or not the switching operation member 2326 is in contact with the bottom receiving member 361. Is done.

  Therefore, for example, by increasing the probability that the switching operation member 2326 will vibrate when the tilting device 2310 is placed in the lowered position when the lottery result is a win, the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 are Since it is possible to predict the lottery result by feeling the repeated load caused by the contact as a change in the load that can be applied to the hand, it is possible to increase the significance of the player pushing the tilting device 2310 to the lowered position. Thereby, effective use of the operation device 2300 can be aimed at (the player can push the tilting device 2310).

  Returning to FIG. In the shaft cover 2330, the action claw portion 2332 has a gentle inclination angle on the near side (left side in FIG. 23), while the inclination angle on the back side (right side in FIG. 23) becomes steep, and the load applied to the player is increased. It is comprised so that suppression is possible.

  With reference to FIG.26 and FIG.27, the vertical motion of the piston member 2362a accompanying rotation (tilting) of the tilting device 2310 is demonstrated. 26 (a), 26 (b), 27 (a), and 27 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device 2310 along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19 (a).

  In FIG. 26 (a), the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position, and the contact between the action claw portion 2332 and the piston member 2362a is shown in FIG. 26 (b) in the state shown in FIG. 26 (a). In FIG. 27 (a), the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) and the piston member 2362a is in a state where the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 ° and the action claw portion 2332 pushes down the piston member 2362a. FIG. 27B shows a state in which the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 27A and the piston member 2362a is raised to the initial position.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the lower case 2360 includes a cylindrical receiving portion 2361c disposed below the cylindrical receiving portion 361c of the first embodiment, and the inside thereof operates in the vertical direction. The upper end portion of the piston member 2362a has a shape in which the front side is cut out by an arc.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the lower end surface 2332b of the action claw portion 2332 is in the state shown in FIG. 26B (the state rotated by 13 ° from the raised position), and the switching point 2332c and the piston member 2362a are The rear arc portion 2332e behind the switching point 2332c (to the right of FIG. 26 (a)) is configured such that the length from the rotation axis O1 decreases as the distance from the switching point 2332c increases. . An arc C1 whose radius is the distance from the rotation axis O1 to the switching point 2332c with the rotation axis O1 as the center is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  A load applied to the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is tilted will be described. Note that the load applied from the piston member 2362a to the moving direction of the tilting device 2310 varies depending on the posture of the tilting device 2310 due to the change in the component ratio of the displacement amount of the tilting device 2310 along the moving direction of the piston member 2362a. Here, the description is omitted, and it is assumed that all loads proportional to the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b are applied against the moving direction of the tilting device 2310.

  When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 ° with reference to the position where the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position (the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26A to the state shown in FIG. 26B). ), The front arc portion 2332d on the front side (left side in FIG. 26B) of the switching point 2332c of the action claw portion 2332 pushes the piston member 2362a to the position P1, so that the coil spring 362b of the biasing device 2362 is displaced. Thus, the load applied from the piston member 2362a to the action claw portion 2332 increases. When the tilting device 2310 is rotated, the player receives a load from both the torsion spring 343 and the biasing device 2362, so that the tilting device 2310 is rotated from FIG. 26 (a) to FIG. 26 (b). Along with this, the load given to the player increases.

  When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 26B (when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26B to the state shown in FIG. 27A), the piston member 2362a Rises to position P2. That is, when the rear arc portion 2332e is formed along the arc C1, the position of the piston member 2362a is maintained with respect to the rotation of the tilting device 2310, so that the radius is formed smaller than the arc C1. As a result, the piston member 2362a rises from the position P1 shown in FIG. 26B to the position P2.

  Therefore, when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26B to the state shown in FIG. 27A, the player increases the load due to the displacement of the torsion spring 343 and recovers the displacement of the coil spring 362b. The resultant force with the decrease in load due to is received as a load.

  In the present embodiment, the amount of change in biasing force that occurs when the torsion spring 343 is displaced by 5 °, and the amount of change in biasing force that occurs when the coil spring 362b is displaced by the distance between the position P1 and the position P2. However, the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b are selected so as to be equivalent. Therefore, the load received by the player in the state of FIG. 26B and the state of FIG. 27A is constant.

  When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 27A (when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 27A to the state shown in FIG. 27B), the piston member 2362a Rises to position P3. Here, the position P3 is a position that is elevated from the position P2 by a distance between the position P1 and the position P2.

  That is, when the tilting device 2310 rotates (tilts) from the state shown in FIG. 27A to the state shown in FIG. 27B, from the state shown in FIG. 26B to the state shown in FIG. The torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b are displaced by the same amount as when the tilting device 2310 is rotated. Therefore, the load received by the player in the state of FIG. 27A and the state of FIG. 27B is constant. Therefore, during the period from FIG. 26B to FIG. 27B (period in which the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 °), the load received by the player can be made constant.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a description will be given of a load applied to the player from the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is operated. FIG. 28 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 2310 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 2310 from the ascending position. In the graph shown in FIG. 28, the horizontal axis indicates the tilt angle in such a manner that the tilting device 2310 is disposed at the ascending position on the left end, and the tilt angle increases in a right direction from there. The vertical axis indicates the tilting device 2310. The load given to the player is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 2310 is torsion spring 343 (until the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the raised position (see FIG. 26A)). The angle rises at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant of FIG.

  A biasing force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b is applied to the tilting device 2310 via the piston member 2362a (see FIG. 26A) with the tilting device 2310 tilted by 3 ° from the raised position. .

  Since the coil spring 362b is disposed in a state of being previously shortened from the natural length in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), the load felt by the player at the position where the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the raised position. Changes rapidly (load change rate changes). In the present embodiment, since the control is switched between the push operation and the pedal operation with this position as a boundary, the player can easily switch the operation method with a sudden change in load as a mark.

  From the state in which the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the rising position to the state in which the tilting device 2310 is further tilted by 10 °, the load applied to the player increases at a rate larger than the load increase rate (angle α1) by the torsion spring 343. .

  The load applied to the player is constant from the state where the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 13 ° from the raised position to the state where it is further tilted by 10 °. Thereby, compared with the case where the urging force further increases even when the tilting device 2310 has an angle of 13 °, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player when operating the tilting device 2310 and to tilt the tilting device 2310. It is possible to easily perform an operation of maintaining the angle at a certain angle.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the piston member 362a of the biasing device 362 is fixed has been described. However, in the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment, the piston member 362a can be tilted during the vertical movement. Will be explained. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the rotary piston member 3364 in the third embodiment, FIG. 29B is a partial front perspective view of the lower case 3360, and FIG. 29C is a shaft cover. 3330 is a partial front perspective view of 3330. FIG. In FIG. 29 (b), a part of the front side of the inner peripheral shape of the cylindrical receiving portion 3361c is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29 (c), the assembly structure of the rotary piston member 3364 is partially imagined. Illustrated with lines.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the rotary piston member 3364 includes a body member 3364a having a plate-like portion extending from a spherical portion having a slightly smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the cylindrical receiving portion 3361c, A cutout portion 3364b cut out in a U-shaped cross section on the same plane as the plane in which the plate-like portion extends from the lower portion of the main body member 3364a, and the cutout portion 3364b are inserted and displaced so as to be displaceable. It mainly includes a long bar-shaped bar member 3364c and a penetrating shaft member 3364d that pivotally supports the bar member 3364c and is fixed to the inside of the spherical portion of the main body member 3364a.

  The rod member 3364c has a shaft support hole into which the rod member 3364c is inserted at the end portion on the side accommodated in the main body member 3364a, and protrudes in a direction parallel to the penetrating direction of the shaft support hole at the opposite end portion. The guide pin portion 3364c1 is provided.

  The through-shaft member 3364d is inserted into and fixed to a spherical portion of the main body member 3364a through a support hole formed along the thickness direction of the plate-like portion, and the rod member 3364c is rotatably supported by the through-shaft member 3364d. The

  As illustrated in FIG. 29B, the rotary piston member 3364 is supported by the cylindrical receiving portion 3361 c of the lower case 3360. The cylindrical receiving portion 3361c is formed in a cylindrical shape whose inner circumference is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the spherical portion of the main body member 3364a of the rotary piston member 3364, and a lid is formed on the upper surface, and the rotary piston is formed on the lid. A notch 3361d having a width slightly larger than the thickness of the plate-like portion of the main body member 3364a of the member 3364 is formed.

  The rod member 3364c and the main body member 3364a are projected outward from the cylindrical receiving portion 3361c through the notch 3361d.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (c), the shaft cover 3330 has a through hole 3331g through which the rod member 3364c is inserted in the cylindrical lower half 3331, and the same plane as the plane in which the through hole 3331g is formed. And a long support hole 3331h configured to be capable of supporting the guide pin 3334c1. Note that the long support hole portion 3331h extends in the range of an angle of 30 ° around the rotation axis O1.

  In the assembled state, the guide pin portion 3364c1 is inserted through the support long hole portion 3331h. The assembling method is such that the tilting device 3310 is brought close to the lower case 3360 with the acting claw portion 332 not contacting the rotary piston member 3364, the rod member 3364c is inserted into the through hole 3331g, and then the tilting device 3310 is rotated to rotate. In this method, the piston member 3364 is pushed in a predetermined amount. Accordingly, the guide pin portion 3364c1 can be fitted into the support long hole portion 3331h through the notch of the support long hole portion 3331h, and the assembled state shown in FIG. 30A can be configured.

  Next, the operation of the rotary piston member 3364 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 (a), 30 (b), 31 (a), and 31 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device 3310 along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19 (a). 30A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 30B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 has been rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the raised position. FIG. 31A shows a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated (tilted) by 10 ° from the raised position, and in FIG. 31B, the tilting device 3310 is rotated (tilted) by 20 ° from the raised position. The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), in the state where the tilting device 3310 is disposed at the raised position, the guide pin portion 3364c1 is the front side of the support slot 3331h (left side of FIG. 30 (a)). In the state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position, the guide pin portion 3364c1 is disposed in the middle of the long support hole portion 3331h.

  Between FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B, the position of the rotary piston member 3364 is not changed, and the shape of the support slot 3331h is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis O1, No load is generated between the guide pin portion 3364c1 and the long support hole portion 3331h, and only a biasing force generated by the torsion spring 343 is applied to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, in a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 10 ° from the raised position, the rotary piston member 3364 is pushed down by the action claw portion 332, and the guide pin portion 3364c1 is formed in the support long hole portion 3331h. It arrange | positions at the edge part of a rear side (FIG. 31 (a) right side). In this state, in addition to the load received from the torsion spring 343, the tilting device 3310 is loaded with an urging force generated from the coil spring 362 b disposed below the rotary piston member 3364.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), in a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 20 ° from the raised position, the support slot 3331h is further rotated clockwise about the rotation axis O1, thereby causing the guide pin portion. When 3364c is pulled and thereby the rotating piston member 3364 rotates, the upper end portion of the plate-like portion of the main body member 3364a that contacts the action claw portion 332 moves in a direction to escape from the action claw portion 332. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotary piston member 3364 from moving further downward, so that the coil spring 362b can be prevented from further shrinking, and an increase in load applied to the tilting device 3310 can be suppressed. Can do.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is biased by a spring member having spring elasticity has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment describes the case where the tilting device 4310 receives a biasing force due to magnetic force. To do. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  32 (a), FIG. 32 (b), FIG. 33 (a), and FIG. 33 (b) are cross sections of the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19 (a). FIG. In FIG. 32A, the state in which the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the raised position is shown in FIG. 32B, and in FIG. 32B, the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 33A shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has been rotated (tilted) by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 32B (a state in which the tilting device 4310 has been rotated (tilted) by 8 ° from the raised position). In (b), the state where the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 5 ° (the state rotated (tilted) by 13 ° from the raised position) from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a) is respectively illustrated. In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b of the biasing device 362 is disposed in a natural length in the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the operation device 4300 is formed of a magnetic material and is arranged to face the moving magnet Ma1 and the moving magnet Ma1 fixed to the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320 of the tilting device 4310. And a fixed magnet Ma2 that is fixed to the rear end portion of the right sensor fixing plate 363b of the lower case 360 and is made of a magnetic material. The moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are formed in a shape along an arc centered on the rotation axis O1, the moving magnet Ma1 has an arc shape with a center angle of about 5 °, and the fixed magnet has a center angle of about 3 Each is configured in a circular arc shape of °, and is configured in such a manner that the magnetism is switched in the radial direction centering on the rotation axis O1, and the magnetic force in the attracting direction works as it comes closer.

  The operation of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 32A, in a state where the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the ascending position, the opposing surfaces of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 move to a position where they do not overlap in the radial direction around the rotation axis O1. A magnet Ma1 and a fixed magnet Ma2 are disposed. The attracting force of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 increases in proportion to the area of the opposing surfaces that overlap each other, but if the opposing surfaces do not overlap, no attracting force is generated (small enough to be ignored).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the upper end position of the fixed magnet Ma2 and the lower end position of the moving magnet Ma1 coincide with each other in the radial direction around the rotation axis O1, and therefore, when the tilting device 4310 starts to move, it moves. A magnetic force in the attracting direction starts to act between the magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, in the state where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position, the area where the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 overlap in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 is maximized. That is, each time the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) from the state where it is placed at the raised position, the magnetic force generated between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 increases in proportion to the rotation angle, and FIG. ) Is the maximum in the state shown. Further, since the upper end position of the moving magnet Ma1 is arranged 2 ° above the upper end position of the fixed magnet Ma2, the tilting device 4310 is further rotated 2 ° from the state shown in FIG. When the rotation angle is 3 ° to 5 °, the maximum magnetic force is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 8 ° from the raised position, the lower end position of the fixed magnet Ma2 and the upper end position of the moving magnet Ma1 coincide with each other in the radial direction around the rotation axis O1. To do. That is, since the opposing surfaces of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 do not overlap, no magnetic force is generated between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 (small enough to be ignored).

  By the time the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts) from the position where the tilting device 4310 rotates 5 ° from the raised position by the time it reaches the state of FIG. 33 (b), it is fixed to the moving magnet Ma1. The overlapping area of the surface facing the magnet Ma2 decreases. Therefore, the moving magnet is proportional to the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 from the position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 5 ° from the ascending position (position where the magnetic force is maximum) until it reaches the state of FIG. The magnetic force generated between Ma1 and fixed magnet Ma2 decreases.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), in a state where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 13 ° from the raised position, the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are separated from each other, and the load applied to the tilting device 4310 includes the torsion spring 343 and the attached spring. Only the urging force generated by the urging device 362 is provided. Therefore, as the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts), the load applied to the tilting device 4310 increases.

  With reference to FIG. 34, the load given to the player from the tilting device 4310 will be described. FIG. 34 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 4310 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 4310 from the ascending position. In the graph shown in FIG. 34, on the horizontal axis, the tilt angle is shown in a manner in which the tilt device 4310 is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 32 (a)) at the left end and increases to the right from there. On the vertical axis, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 4310 is shown. In FIG. 34, for easy understanding, a graph assuming that the displacement of the coil spring 362b is proportional to the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is described (the shape of the action claw portion 332 described in the first embodiment). Will ignore the effect).

  As shown in FIG. 34, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 4310 is torsion spring 343 (until the tilting device 4310 is tilted by 3 ° from the raised position (see FIG. 32 (b)). Tilt in such a manner that a magnetic force MF1 generated as a component in the rotational direction of the tilting device 4310 is added between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 to a straight line rising at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant of FIG. It increases in proportion to the rotation angle of the device 4310.

  With the tilting device 4310 tilted by 3 ° from the raised position, a biasing force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b starts to be applied to the tilting device 4310 via the piston member 362a (see FIG. 32B). At the same time, the overlapping area in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the opposing surfaces of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 starts to become maximum.

  Since the section with the largest area continues until the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 reaches 5 °, the magnetic force does not change in the section, and the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and the coil spring 362b (FIG. 32 (b)). The load applied to the tilting device 4310 changes as the urging force increases due to the displacement of (see). Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b is disposed in a natural length, so that the load smoothly rises from the state where the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is 3 ° from the raised position.

  When the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts) 3 ° from the position where the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is 5 ° from the rising position (rotates (tilts) from the rising position to 8 °), the moving magnet Ma1 and The area overlapping in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 on the surface facing the fixed magnet Ma2 starts to decrease. By making this decrease amount larger than the increase amount of the urging force caused by the displacement of the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and the coil spring 362b (see FIG. 32 (b)), the rotation angle is changed from the position of 5 °. The load on the player is reduced up to the 8 ° position.

  That is, while the tilting device 4310 is disposed between the raised position and the position where the rotation angle is 5 °, the load applied to the player increases as the rotation angle increases, while the rotation angle is 5 °. Since the load applied to the player decreases as the rotation angle increases from the position of 5 ° to the position of the rotation angle of 8 °, the sign of the change rate of the load is reversed at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °. Will do. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the load change rate has changed at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °, and the amount by which the player operates the tilting device 4310 at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °. Since this can be used as a mark for grasping, this configuration can be used for games.

  If the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is further rotated from a position where the tilting device 4310 is 8 ° from the ascending position, the fluctuation of the load due to the magnetic force disappears. Therefore, as the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is increased, The biasing force applied to the player increases due to the displacement of the coil spring 362b (see FIG. 32B). In other words, the load change rate is reversed again and again at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the change rate of the load has changed at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °, and the amount by which the player operates the tilting device 4310 at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °. It can be used as a mark for grasping.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, in the process of rotating the tilting device 4310, the load applied to the player is reduced with the position where the rotation angle is 8 ° as a valley bottom. Therefore, as compared with the case where the load applied to the player increases as the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 increases, it is possible to easily maintain the tilting device 4310 in a posture where the rotation angle is 8 °. Accordingly, it is possible to easily maintain the posture of the tilting device 4310 at a position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° or more from the ascending position before the pedal operation.

  In the present embodiment, a return device that returns the tilting device 4310 from the position of the rotation angle of 8 ° to the position of 5 ° (not shown, such as a device that blows air from below along the circumferential direction of the tilting device 4310). Is provided. Thereby, the returning operation of the tilting device 4310 from the lowered position to the raised position can be assisted, and the tilting device 4310 can be prevented from continuing to stop at the rotation angle of 8 °.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the urging force for returning the tilting device 310 to the raised position side is changed only by the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310 is described. However, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is a tilting device. The case where the urging force applied to the tilting device 5310 also changes depending on the rotation (tilting) speed of 5310 (when the urging force increases when the rotation speed is large) will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 35 is a side view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 35, the operation device 5300 is configured in such a manner that the upper cover 5311 of the tilting device 5310 includes a recessed portion 5316b that is recessed in a groove shape along the left-right direction of the curved wall portion 5316. A third urging device 5380 is provided at the rear upper part of the upper case 5370. The third urging device 5380 is a device that applies a load to the tilting device 5310 by contacting the curved wall portion 5316.

  With reference to FIG. 36, the assembly structure with the upper case 5370 of the 3rd biasing apparatus 5380 is demonstrated. 36A is a top view of the upper case 5370, and FIGS. 36B and 36C are the upper case 5370 and the third urging device 5380 taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36A. FIG. In FIG. 36C, the rotation roller 5381 of the third urging device 5380 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the upper case 5370 has a box-shaped storage box portion 5371 that is opened toward the front side at the upper portion thereof, and extends as a long hole along the front-rear direction on the side surface of the storage box portion 5371. And a pair of cylindrical portions 5373 that support the rotating roller 5381 at two points, and an engaging portion 5374 to which the torsion spring 5383 is engaged.

  The third urging device 5380 abuts on the tilting device 5310 and rotates with the rotation (tilting) of the tilting device 5310, and rotatably supports the rotating roller 5381, and in the escape hole 5372. It mainly includes a shaft bar member 5382 to be inserted, and a torsion spring 5383 that is wound around the shaft bar member 5382 and gives an elastic biasing force to the rotating roller 5381.

  In the torsion spring 5383, one arm portion comes into contact with the lower portion of the locking portion 5374, and the other arm portion comes into contact with the lower portion of the projecting pin 5381c of the rotation roller 5381 so that the rotation roller 5381 is wound downward. The biasing force is increased when rotating counterclockwise (FIG. 36B). On the other hand, when the rotating roller 5381 rotates in the upward direction (FIG. 36 (b) clockwise), the projecting pin 5381c of the rotating roller 5381 is only separated from the other arm portion of the torsion spring 5383, There is no change in force.

  The rotating roller 5381 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.37 (a) is a side view of the rotation roller 5381, and FIG.37 (b) is a front view of the rotation roller 5381 in the arrow XXXVIIb of Fig.37 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 37, the rotating roller 5381 has a disk-shaped main body 5381a, a circular section in the center of the circle of the main body 5381a, and a shaft bar member 5382 ( 36c), a projecting pin 5381c projecting from the eccentric position of the main body portion 5381a along the thickness direction, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 5381a to the center portion. And a recessed portion 5381d that is recessed toward the center and extends in the axial direction.

  The protruding pin 5381c is a portion to which the torsion spring 5383 is locked, and abuts on the arm portion of the torsion spring 5383 from above (see FIG. 36B). The recessed portion 5381d is a recessed portion for allowing the rotating roller 5381 to move backward, and is recessed with a width larger than the diameter of the cylindrical portion 5373.

  Next, the operation relationship between the tilting device 5310 and the third biasing device 5380 will be described. FIG. 38A, FIG. 38B, FIG. 39A, FIG. 39B, FIG. 40A, and FIG. 40B correspond to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device 5300 in a line.

  FIG. 38A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 5310 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 38B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 5310 has been rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the raised position. FIG. 39A shows a state in which the tilting device 5310 is further rotated (tilted) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 38B. In FIG. 39B, the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 6 ° (tilted) from the raised position. 40 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 5310 is quickly rotated (tilted) by 14 ° from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), and FIG. 40 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. The state where the tilting device 5310 is further rotated (tilted) from the state shown in a) is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the curved wall portion 5316 of the upper cover 5311 includes a set of a recessed portion 5316b and a contact portion 5316c that is a portion that contacts the rotating roller 5381. That is, the same as the abutting portion 5316c (formed at 3 ° around the rotation axis O1) and the subsequent recessed portion 5316b (formed at 2.5 ° around the rotation axis O1) that contacts the rotating roller 5381 first. Then, two sets of contact portions 5316c and recessed portions 5316b are formed. The last abutting portion 5316c (the abutting portion on the lower side of the recessed portion 5361b disposed at the uppermost portion) is approximately half as wide as the other abutting portions 5361c (centering on the rotation axis O1). At approximately 1.5 °).

  In FIG. 38 (a), since the recessed portion 5316b is disposed at a position facing the rotation roller 5381, the rotation roller 5381 and the curved wall portion 5316 do not come into contact with each other, and the tilting device 5310 is rotated. There is no increase in load applied from the rotating roller 5381 to the tilting device 5310.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (b), when the tilting device 5310 is rotated 3 ° from the raised position, the contact portion 5316c and the rotation roller 5381 start to contact each other. By further rotating the tilting device 5310 from here (see FIG. 39A), the biasing force accompanying the displacement of the torsion spring 5383 from the rotating roller 5381 starts to be applied to the tilting device 5310.

  As shown in FIG. 39B, when the tilting device 5310 is rotated 6 ° from the state shown in FIG. 38A, the rotating roller 5381 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the contact portion 5316c. When the tilting device 5310 is slightly rotated from this position, the rotating roller 5381 and the recessed portion 5381d face each other, and the contact between the rotating roller 5381 and the curved wall portion 5316 is released, so that the rotating roller 5381 is twisted. An attempt is made to return to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring 5383.

  Therefore, when the rotation speed of the tilting device 5310 is slow, the next contact portion 5316c (the contact portion 5316c adjacent to the contact portion 5316c with which the rotation roller 5381 is in contact in FIG. 39B). Before the rotating roller 5381 comes into contact with the rotating roller 5381, the rotating roller 5381 returns to the initial position (see FIG. 38A).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40A, when the tilting device 5310 is quickly rotated in such a manner that the next contact portion 5316c contacts the rotating roller 5381 before the rotating roller 5381 returns, Each time the tilting device 5310 rotates (tilts) facing the contact portion 5316c, the displacement of the rotating roller 5381 and the torsion spring 5383 increases (accumulates), and the load applied from the rotating roller 5381 to the tilting device 5310 increases. Become.

  Therefore, the load applied to the player can be changed according to the speed at which the tilting device 5310 rotates. In the present embodiment, the push operation and the pedal operation are switched at the position where the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position, but as described above with reference to FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b). Since the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 do not come into contact with each other at the position from the ascending position corresponding to the push operation to 3 °, the load is excessive regardless of how quickly the player operates the tilting device 5310 at this position. It will never be. For this reason, the operation resistance of the tilting device 5310 does not change depending on the displacement speed of the tilting device 5310 when the player performs the push operation. For example, when the player makes repeated hits by the push operation, the tilting device 5310 becomes hard and the hitting is repeated. Can be avoided.

  On the other hand, at a position after rotating at an angle larger than 3 ° from the ascending position, the contact portion 5316c starts to contact the rotating roller 5381, and then the speed at which the recessed portion 5316b passes through the position facing the rotating roller 5381. Thus, the state of the rotating roller 5381 changes when the contact portion 5316c and the rotating roller 5381 contact each other again (the rotation device 5381 tilts from the rotating roller 5381 by changing the amount of rotation from the initial position of the rotating roller 5381). The load applied to 5310 changes).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation resistance of the tilting device 5310 can be changed in accordance with the displacement speed of the tilting device 5310 in the range where the pedal operation is performed, while the operation resistance of the tilting device 5310 is in the range where the push operation is performed. The operation performance can be improved without depending on the speed of displacement.

  FIG. 40A shows a case where the rotating roller 5381 rotates by the entire circumference of the contact portion 5316c. In this state, the recessed portion 5381 d of the rotating roller 5381 is brought into a state of reaching the cylindrical portion 5373.

  As shown in FIG. 40B, when the tilting device 5310 is further rotated from FIG. 40A, the recessed portion 5381d of the rotating roller 5381 is arranged to face the cylindrical portion 5373. Therefore, the rotating roller 5381 can move along the escape hole 5372 in the direction approaching the cylindrical portion 5373.

  As a result, even if the load applied to the tilting device 5310 from the rotating roller 5381 becomes excessive, the rotating roller 5381 can move in a direction away from the tilting device 5310, so that when the tilting device 5310 is operated quickly, a game It is possible to prevent the load received by the person from the tilting device 5310 from becoming excessive.

  Next, a case where the length of the contact portion 5316c is changed depending on the position will be described with reference to FIGS. 41A, 41B, and 42 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 5300b taken along a line corresponding to the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG.

  The operation device 5300b differs from the operation device 5300 only in the formation pattern of the recessed portion 5316b and the contact portion 5316c of the curved wall portion 5316. That is, the contact portion 5316c with which the tilting device 5310b first comes into contact from the ascending position shown in FIG. 41 (a) is shortened (formed at 1 ° around the rotation axis O1), and the tilting device 5310b is further moved from the ascending position. The contact portion 5316c that contacts the rotating roller 5381 in a state of being quickly rotated by 10 ° (see FIG. 41B) is increased in width (formed at 4 ° about the rotation axis O1), and further tilted from the raised position. In a state where the device 5310b is quickly rotated 20 ° (see FIG. 42), the contact portion 5316c that contacts the rotation roller 5381 is further increased in width (formed at 7 ° about the rotation axis O1).

  For this reason, not only a player who operates the tilting device 5310b quickly but also a player who operates the tilting device 5310b slowly may feel a change in the operational feeling that the load applied from the tilting device 5310b changes. it can.

  That is, in the case of assuming a player who operates the tilting device 5310b so slowly that the rotating roller 5381 completely returns to the initial position in the section of each recessed portion 5381d, the rotating roller 5381 contacts with the rotating roller 5381 in FIG. From the start of contact with the contact portion 5316c to the end of contact, the biasing force generated when the contact portion 5316c with a short width disposed below the contact portion 5316c and the rotating roller 5381 contact each other. Four times as much energizing force is given.

  Further, when the contact portion 5316c having a short width comes into contact with the rotating roller 5381 from the contact start to the contact end with the contact portion 5316c contacting the rotation roller 5381 in the state shown in FIG. A biasing force of seven times the resulting biasing force is applied. In addition, at the moment when the contact between the rotating roller 5381 and the contact portion 5316c is released, the load applied to the tilting device 5310b rapidly decreases. Therefore, the player pushes in the tilting device 5310b without looking at the tilting device 5310b, using the change in the maximum value of the load applied from the rotating roller 5381 and the sudden decrease in the load as a mark. Can be expected.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. In the first embodiment, the case where the urging force for returning the tilting device 310 to the raised position side is changed only by the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310 has been described. However, the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment is a tilting device. A case where the urging force applied to the tilting device 6310 also changes depending on the rotation (tilting) speed of the 6310 (when the urging force decreases when the rotation speed is large) will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 43 is a side view of the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG. 43 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 6310 is disposed at the raised position, and the rear portion of the operation device 6300 is partially viewed in cross section. As shown in FIG. 43, the operation device 6300 has a contact point J1 at which the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 of the upper cover 6311 of the tilting device 6310 contacts the rotating member 6381 in a state where the tilting device 6310 is disposed at the raised position. As described above, the arc C6 centering on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 6310 is used as a reference, and the shape becomes smaller than the diameter of the arc C6 as the distance from the contact point J1 increases. Force device 6380. The fourth urging device 6380 is a device that applies a load to the tilting device 6310 by coming into contact with the curved wall portion 6316.

  The upper case 6370 has a box-shaped storage box portion 6371 that is opened toward the front side at the upper portion thereof, a shaft support hole 6372 that is formed in a side surface of the storage box portion 6371, and a torsion spring 6383. And a locking portion 6373.

  The fourth urging device 6380 has a rotating member 6381 that applies a load to the tilting device 6310 by contacting the tilting device 6310, and a shaft rod that rotatably supports the rotating member 6381 and is inserted into the shaft support hole 6372. It mainly includes a member 6382 and a torsion spring 6383 that is wound around the shaft bar member 6382 and gives an elastic biasing force to the rotating member 6381.

  The rotating member 6381 includes a through hole 6381b that is eccentrically drilled in the gourd-shaped main body portion 6381a and through which the shaft bar member 6382 is inserted, and in a direction parallel to the axial direction so that the torsion spring 6383 can be locked. A protruding pin 6381c is provided.

  In the torsion spring 6383, one arm portion comes into contact with the lower portion of the locking portion 6373 and the other arm portion comes into contact with the lower portion of the projecting pin 6281c of the rotating member 6381 so that the rotating member 6381 is wound downward. In the case of rotating counterclockwise (FIG. 43), the biasing force is increased. On the other hand, when the rotating member 6381 rotates in the upward direction (clockwise in FIG. 43), the protruding pin 6381c of the rotating member 6381 is only separated from the other arm portion of the torsion spring 5383, and the biasing force No change will occur.

  FIGS. 44A and 44B are partial side views of the operation device 6300. FIG. 44A, the tilting device 6310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position. In FIG. 44B, the tilting device 6310 is quickly rotated by 17 ° from the state shown in FIG. (The state in which the tilting device 6310 is rotated by 20 ° from the raised position) is respectively illustrated, and in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the rear portion of the operation device 6300 is partially viewed in cross section. .

  In FIG. 44A, the rotating member 6381 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 by the urging force of the torsion spring 6383, and the contact between the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 is maintained. Here, assuming that the force generated by the contact between the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 is the same along the circumferential direction of the tilting device 6310, the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 in FIG. 44 is shorter than the radius of the arc C6, the load given from the rotating member 6381 is more in the state shown in FIG. 44A than in the state shown in FIG. As a result, the arm length of the moment generated in the tilting device 6310 is shortened.

  Therefore, in a state where the rotating member 6281 is in contact with the curved wall portion 6316, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 6310 generated by the rotating member 6381 is reduced as the angle at which the tilting device 6310 rotates (tilts) from the raised position is increased. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the tilting device 6310 increases while securing the load applied to the tilting device 6310 from the state in which the tilting device 6310 is arranged at the raised position and starts to rotate, the tilting device 6310 gives the player. It is possible to prevent the load from becoming excessively large.

  FIG. 44B shows a state in which the tilting device 6310 is quickly rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44A, and in this state, the rotating member 6381 is separated from the curved wall portion 6316. That is, a state in which the tilting device 6310 is rotated at a higher speed than the rotating member 6381 is rotated by the urging force of the torsion spring 6383 and is attached to the curved wall portion 6316 is illustrated.

  In this case, since the load applied to the tilting device 6310 from the rotating member 6381 is eliminated, the force required to operate the tilting device 6310 can be reduced. That is, compared with the case where the tilting device 6310 is operated slowly, the rotation resistance of the tilting device 6310 can be reduced when the pedal is operated at a high speed. When the tilting device 6310 is operated at a high speed (operation to push in) while securing the rotation resistance necessary for facilitating the maintenance operation, the rotation resistance is released by releasing it at once. Compared with a case where a device with high resistance is pushed through, the feeling of fatigue felt by the player can be reduced.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. In the first embodiment, the case where the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is determined based on the posture in which the biasing force is changed has been described. However, the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment rotates the tilting device 7310 ( The case where the tilting device 7310 is locked when it reaches the starting point of the pedal operation will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  45 (a), FIG. 45 (b), FIG. 46 (a) and FIG. 46 (b) are cross sections of the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment at the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19 (a). FIG. 45 (a), the state where the tilting device 7310 is disposed at the raised position, and in FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (a), the state where the tilting device 7310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position, FIG. 46B shows a state in which the tilting device 7310 is quickly rotated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the operation device 7300 includes a slide device 7318 in which the upper cover 7311 of the tilt device 7310 is slidable, and a displacement urging device 7319 disposed on the curved wall portion 7316. Are comprised in the aspect provided.

  The slide device 7318 includes a locking member 7318a having a Z-shaped cross section inserted into a through-hole 7311a that is drilled from the pressing plate portion 312 of the upper cover 7311 to the rear side wall portion 315, and the locking member 7318a. And a coil spring 7318b that urges backward.

  The locking member 7318a is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction (FIG. 45 (a) left-right direction) with respect to the upper cover 7311. When the locking member 7318a is disposed rearward, the tilting device 7310 is rotated to rotate the rotation shaft. The power action device 363 can be brought into contact with the rotation direction about O1.

  The displacement urging device 7319 includes an action member 7319a that is pivotally supported by the curved wall portion 7316 of the upper cover 7311 within a range of being accommodated in a notch 7322a formed in the curved wall portion 7322 of the lower cover 7320, and the action member 7319a. And a torsion spring 7319b that urges the bending member 7316 in the direction close to the curved wall portion 7316, and a direction in which the action member 7319a approaches the action member 7319a from the side where the action member 7319a opens and closes the bending member 7316a. And an inertial motion member 7319c configured to be movable in the main body and a tension spring 7319d for maintaining the inertial motion member 7319c downward.

  The action member 7319a is provided with a moving magnet Ma7 made of a magnetic material at the tip, and has a polarity in the direction of being attracted to the fixed magnet Ma2 in the radial direction of a circle centering on the rotation axis O1. The lower end of the action member 7319a is inclined in such a manner that the lower the distance from the curved wall portion 7316 is, the closer to the upper end of the inertia action member 7319c. Thereby, when the inertial action member 7319c moves upward, the action member 7319a can be rotated in a direction away from the curved wall portion 7316.

  Inertia acting member 7319c is made of a material that is heavy enough to allow sufficient inertia to act (to the extent that it can stay in place against the quick movement of tilting device 7310), and has a peripheral surface on the side in contact with curved wall portion 7316. The curved wall portion 7316 is formed in an arc shape along the inner peripheral shape. Therefore, when the inertial action member 7319c moves relative to the upper cover 7311, the movement direction is a direction along the peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 7316.

  As shown in FIG. 45B, when the tilting device 7310 rotates (tilts) by 3 ° from the raised position, the action claw portion 332 starts to contact the piston member 362a, and the lower end of the locking member 7318a is the power action device 363. Against the rotation device 7310 in the rotational direction. Therefore, the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is mechanically locked, and a state where the tilting device 7310 cannot be further rotated (tilted) can be configured.

  Thereby, a player's erroneous operation can be suppressed. That is, when the player who operates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment can perceive the area where the push operation is performed and the area where the pedal is operated due to a change in the load generated from the tilting device 310, the boundary becomes ambiguous. For example, even if a player thinks that he is hitting repeatedly in the push operation area, the tilting device 310 is actually pushed into the pedal operation area, which may make it difficult to hit repeatedly. It was. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the load change, the boundary between the push operation area and the pedal operation area is formed at the position where the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is stopped. Misoperation can be suppressed.

  In addition, the contact surface of the locking member 7318a with the power application device 363 is configured as a surface perpendicular to the arc centered on the rotation axis O1 (see FIG. 45B). This prevents the locking member 7318a from sliding to the near side due to the force received from the power application device 363 when a load in the rotational direction is further applied from the state shown in FIG. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, by moving the locking member 7318a of the slide device 7318 to the near side, the contact between the locking member 7318a and the power application device 363 is released, and the tilting device 7310 is rotated. It becomes possible to make it.

  Since the direction in which the tilting device 7310 is rotated and the direction in which the locking member 7318a is moved are substantially perpendicular (the angle formed is close to a right angle), the operation of rotating the tilting device 7310 and the locking member 7318a are moved. It can be difficult to perform the operation simultaneously. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the locking member 7318a from moving naturally and causing an erroneous operation in which the tilting device 7310 is erroneously pushed into the pedal operation area.

  When the tilting device 7310 is slowly pushed in from the position shown in FIG. 46A, the tilting device 7310 is rotated with the inertial action member 7319c stopped relative to the upper cover 7311. In this case, the distance between the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 remains large, and the attractive force is negligibly small.

  On the other hand, the push-in operation is performed from the state shown in FIG. 46A, and the tilting device 7310 is displaced at an excessively high speed, or the tilting member 7318a is tilted from the raised position with the locking member 7318a fixed to the near side for some reason. When the device 7310 is rotated, as shown in FIG. 46B, the action member 7319a is rotated by the relative action of the inertia action member 7319c with respect to the upper cover 7311, and moves with the fixed magnet Ma2. When the distance to the magnet Ma7 is shortened, the resistance due to the magnetic force is increased. As a result, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 7310 can be temporarily increased, and the player can change the operational feeling due to the braking effect, and the tilting device 7310 rotates vigorously in the pedal operation area ( The tilting device 7310 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Even if the inertial action member 7319c is displaced upward when the tilting device 7310 reaches the lowered position vigorously, the tilting device 7310 returns upward after the player releases the hand from the tilting device 7310. As the action member 7319c is moved downward due to inertia, the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are attracted to increase the resistance when the tilting device 7310 returns, and the resistance of the tilting device 7310 increases. It is possible to avoid delaying the return.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), it is between the raised position of the tilting device 7310 and a position after being rotated by 3 ° from the raised position (shown in FIG. 45 (a)). When the tilting device 7310 is disposed within the range of the push operation, that is, between the position and the position shown in FIG. 45 (b), the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are arranged in a circle centered on the rotation axis O1. It is set as the aspect which does not overlap in radial direction. Therefore, in the range of the push operation, it is possible to avoid the displacement of the tilting device 7310 due to the attractive force between the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2.

  That is, when the tilting device 7310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, if the attracting force works by quickly rotating the tilting device 7310, the speed of the return operation of the tilting device 7310 after the push operation is slowed down. For example, when performing a continuous hitting operation within the range of the push operation, it becomes difficult to perform the operation, and the comfort of the game may be impaired.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 from attracting in the range of the push operation, and even if the tilting device 7310 is displaced at an arbitrary speed, the tilting device It can be avoided that the speed of the return motion of 7310 becomes slow, and the comfort of the game can be improved.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player changes depending on the posture of the tilting device 310 has been described. However, the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment has the player depending on the speed at which the tilting device 8310 rotates (tilts). A case where the load applied to the power supply changes will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  47 (a) and 47 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19 (a). 47A shows a state in which the tilting device 8310 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 47B shows a state in which the tilting device 8310 has been quickly rotated from the raised position by a predetermined angle.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the operation device 8300, the upper cover 8311 of the tilting device 8310 includes a displacement urging device 8319 disposed on the curved wall portion 8316, and the upper case 8370 is tilted on the rear portion of the inner peripheral wall. A stationary magnet Ma81 is provided that is formed along a rotation trajectory of the outer end portion of the 8310 and is made of a magnetic material whose polarity is switched in a direction along the radial direction of the rotation trajectory of the tilting device 8310.

  The displacement urging device 8319 includes an action member 8319a that is pivotally supported by the curved wall portion 8316 of the upper cover 8311 and the action member within a range accommodated in the notch 7322a formed in the curved wall portion 7322 of the lower cover 7320. A torsion spring 7319b that urges 8319a in the direction approaching the curved wall portion 8316 and a lower side of the action member 8319a, and the action member 8319a is closer to the action member 8319a from the side that opens and closes the bending member 8316. An inertial motion member 7319c configured to be movable in a direction and a tension spring 7319d that maintains the inertial motion member 7319c downward are mainly provided.

  The action member 8319a is a member that is bifurcated from the position pivotally supported by the curved wall 8316, and one arm part (the arm part on the left side in FIG. 47A) is the action in the seventh embodiment. Similar to the member 7319 a, the through-hole is provided on the inner side of the curved wall portion 8316 and the other arm portion (the right arm portion in FIG. 47A) is formed in the thickness direction of the curved wall portion 8316. It is configured in such a manner that it extends outward from the curved wall 8316 through 8316b.

  A moving magnet Ma82 made of a magnetic material is disposed at the tip of the other arm portion of the action member 8319a, and the direction of the magnetic pole of the moving magnet Ma82 is formed in a direction that generates a magnetic force attracting the fixed magnet Ma81. The

  The lower end of one arm portion of the action member 8319a is inclined in such a manner that it is farther from the curved wall portion 8316 as it comes closer to the upper end of the inertia action member 7319c. Thereby, when the inertial action member 7319c moves upward, the action member 8319a can be rotated in a direction away from the curved wall portion 8316.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the tilting device 8310 is disposed at the raised position, the action member 8319a is in a posture in which one arm portion is brought close to the curved wall portion 8316, and in this posture, the other arm portion. The moving magnet Ma82 is brought close to the fixed magnet Ma81. For this reason, the magnetic force (adsorption force) between the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 becomes so large that it cannot be ignored, and the resistance when the tilting device 8310 is rotated increases.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the tilting device 8310 is quickly rotated from the raised position by a predetermined amount, the inertial action member 7319c stays in inertia, and the inertial action member 7319c becomes one arm portion of the action member 8319a and the curved wall. The action member 8319a is rotated against the urging force of the torsion spring 7319b (FIG. 47 (a) is rotated clockwise). Thereby, the moving magnet Ma82 disposed on the other arm is separated from the fixed magnet Ma81, and the magnetic force between the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 becomes so small that it can be ignored.

  On the other hand, when slowly operating the tilting device 8310, the inertial action member 8319c moves at the same speed as the upper cover 8311 (stops relative to the upper cover 8311). Therefore, it is possible to secure a large rotational resistance felt by the player when the tilting device 8310 is slowly rotated, and to reduce the rotational resistance felt by the player when the tilting device 8310 is quickly rotated.

  Accordingly, for example, when the tilting device 8310 is maintained at a predetermined position, when the tilting device 8310 is operated slowly, the rotation resistance is increased and the maintenance is facilitated, while the tilting device 8310 is tilted at a stroke. When the operation of the device 8310 is quick, the rotation resistance can be reduced, and the force required to push the tilting device 8310 can be reduced. Therefore, the operation burden when the player operates the tilting device 8310 can be reduced.

  In addition, the inertia acting member 7319c has a surface in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 8316 along the arc shape of the inner peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 8316, and moves relative to the upper cover 8311. At the position (maximum diameter position) where the movement distance with respect to the rotation angle of the tilting device 8310 is the maximum (moving in the same direction as the rotation direction of the tilting device 8310). It is configured to be able to use the inertia most easily, which is movable along the moving direction of the cover 8311.

  Therefore, even when the rotation angle of the tilting device 8310 is small, the inertial action member 7319c can be easily moved relative to the upper cover 8311, and a change in rotational resistance due to magnetic force can be easily caused.

  Even if the inertial action member 7319c is displaced upward when the tilting device 8310 reaches the lowered position vigorously, the tilting device 8310 returns upward after the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 8310. As the operation is performed, the inertial action member 7319c is moved downward due to inertia, so that the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 are attracted when the tilting device 8310 returns. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 8310 that has been pushed in at a stretch from returning vigorously, and to produce a profound feeling due to the slow return operation of the tilting device 8310.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the first embodiment, the case where the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is determined based on the posture in which the urging force changes is described. However, the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment rotates the tilting device 9310 ( The tilting device 9310 is locked when it reaches the starting point of the pedal operation, and the tilting device 9310 is translated in order to release the locking. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  48 (a), FIG. 48 (b), FIG. 49 (a), FIG. 49 (b) and FIG. 50 show the tilting device in the ninth embodiment on the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19 (a). FIG. 48A shows a state in which the tilting device 9310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 48B shows a state in which the tilting device 9310 has been rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the raised position. 48A shows a state in which the tilting device 9310 has been translated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 48B. In FIG. 49B, the tilting device 9310 has changed from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 50, the state of being quickly rotated (tilted) to the lowered position is a position 3 ° from the raised position from the state where the tilting device 9310 is disposed at the lowered position (the state shown in FIG. 48B and the tilting device 9310). Each of the states is returned to a state where only the front and rear positions are different).

  Further, in FIGS. 48A, 48B, 49A, 49B, and 50, the vicinity of the rotation axis O1 is the recessed bearing portion 9361a (the tilting device 9310 of the lower case 9360). The cross-section is partially viewed in a cross-section including a portion that supports the shaft.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the tilting device 9310 includes an extended half shaft portion 313c (see FIG. 9) of the upper cover 9311 and an extended half shaft portion 331c (see FIG. 9) of the shaft cover 330. A shaft-fixing member BR9 having a shape having a cut-out surface BR9a, which is a cup-shaped member to be fitted and whose outer periphery is notched with a straight line, and a shaft member 340 (see FIG. 10) And a torsion spring 9343 that applies an urging force to the tilting device 9310 in the rotational direction and the front-rear direction.

  The upper cover 9311 includes a moving magnet Ma9 that is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the curved wall portion 9316 and is elastically supported so as to be movable in the radial direction of the curved wall portion 9316. The moving magnet Ma9 is movable in the direction approaching the curved wall portion 9316 by the centrifugal force generated by the rotation of the tilting device 9310.

  The shaft fixing member BR9 of the tilting device 9310 is configured to be capable of translational operation in the front-rear direction inside the recessed bearing portion 9361a of the lower case 9360. That is, the concave bearing portion 9361a has a shape formed when the outer circle of the shaft fixing member BR9 is translated by a distance L1 (an arc having a radius r1 (90 ° arc) is back and forth (FIG. 48 (a) ) Are arranged in a pair, and the lower end portions thereof are formed in a front-rear (left-right direction in FIG. 48 (a)) shape connected by a straight line having a distance L1.

  An upper case 9370 fastened and fixed to the upper side of the lower case 9360 and pivotally supporting the tilting device 9310 includes a recessed bearing portion 9371 that is disposed to face the recessed bearing portion 9361a of the lower case 9360 and supports the shaft fixing member BR9.

  The recessed bearing portion 9371 has a shape that is occupied when the shaft fixing member BR9 is moved in the front-rear direction in a posture in which the notch surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 is in a state along the front-rear direction (FIG. 48 (a) left-right direction). Based on the above, the center portion is directed upward, and the arc portion of the shaft fixing member BR9 is configured to be recessed with an arc having a size that allows rotation. In other words, the concave bearing portion 9371 is configured to have a shape in which the arcs at both front and rear end portions and the arc at the center portion are connected by a locking plane 9371a extending along the front-rear direction.

  The lower case 9360 has a push-back wall portion 9361h having a predetermined width in the vertical direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front side of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c, and a rear side from the power action device 363 on the front side of the rubber plate GR1. And a locking rubber member 9361i that is disposed in a protruding manner and has rubber elasticity.

  The torsion spring 9343 is formed such that one arm portion 9343a is formed in a bent shape at the tip and is in contact with the pushing-back wall portion 9361h of the lower case 9360, and the other arm portion 9343b is a rotation shaft of the tilting device 9310. It is latched by a convex portion disposed on the upper cover 311 diagonally above O1 (upper left in FIG. 48), and an urging force is generated in the direction of opening both arms. That is, the urging force acts in a direction to return the tilting device 9310 to the raised position.

  The locking rubber member 9361i is a position where the tilting device 9310 interferes with the bending member 350 in a state where the tilting device 9310 is disposed at the front end portion of the recessed bearing portion 9361a, while the tilting device 9310 is behind the recessed bearing portion 9361a. In the state of being arranged at the side end portion, it is arranged at a position where interference with the bending member 350 is avoided (the comb-like portion 352 in the state where the tilting device 9310 is arranged at the front side end portion of the recessed bearing portion 9361a). ) And the rotation trajectory of the comb-shaped portion 352 in a state where the tilting device 9310 is disposed at the back end of the recessed bearing portion 9361a).

  As a result, the tilting device 9310 is moved into the concave bearing portion 9310i for some reason (for example, the locking plane 9371a is worn and the shaft fixing member BR9 cannot be locked). In the case of over-rotation in the state of being arranged at the front side end portion of 9361a, it can function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the tilting device 9310. Further, by forming from a rubber material, a sufficient amount of deformation can be secured by the locking rubber member 9361i, so that a member (curved member 350 or the like) whose shape of the tilting device 9310 is strictly managed is deformed. Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in a state where the tilting device 9310 is disposed at the raised position, the shaft fixing member BR9 is located at the front end of the recessed bearing portion 9361a of the lower case (the left end of FIG. 48 (a)). ) And a gap is formed between the notch surface BR9a and the locking plane 9371a at an angle of 3 ° with the rotation axis O1 as the center.

  When a load is applied to the tilting device 9310 in the direction of the arrow F1 from the state of FIG. 48 (a), the tilting device 9310 rotates. When the tilting device 9310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the state where the tilting device 9310 is disposed at the raised position, the notch surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 and the locking plane 9371a of the upper case are brought together as shown in FIG. By abutting on the surface, the rotation of the shaft fixing member BR9 is stopped, and the movement of the tilting device 9310 is stopped.

  Therefore, as described above in the first embodiment, compared to the case where the player switches the operation method according to the load applied from the tilting device 310, in this embodiment, the tilt is performed in the push operation region of 3 ° from the ascending position. Since the device 9310 is stopped, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player cannot recognize a change in load applied from the tilting device 9310 and erroneously operates.

  In order to further rotate the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 48B, as shown in FIG. 49A, move the tilting device 9310 in the direction of the arrow F2 (right side in FIG. 48B). ) To be translated to release the contact between the notch surface BR9a and the locking plane 9371a. In the state shown in FIG. 49A, one arm portion 9343a of the torsion spring 9343 is pressed against the pushback wall portion 9361h and deformed by a predetermined amount.

  Here, since the directions of the arrow F1 and the arrow F2 are different, it is possible to prevent the tilting device 9310 from translating to the back side while the tilting device 9310 rotates. Further, in order to translate the tilting device 9310 before rotating it, it is possible to push the vicinity of the rotation axis O1 into the back side. However, the tilting device 9310 is a device that rotates, and the side far from the rotation axis O1 is moved. Since the operation load is smaller when the button is pressed, it is possible to recommend the player to press the opposite side of the rotation axis O1 (the upper end of the tilting device 9310), and there is a situation where the tilting device 9310 moves in translation before rotating. Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed.

  When the tilting device 9310 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the tilting device 9310 can be operated to the lowered position as shown in FIG. 49 (b). Here, when the pedal operation is performed slowly (less than a predetermined speed) from the state shown in FIG. 49A in a manner in which the tilting device 9310 is displaced, the state in which the moving magnet Ma9 is separated from the curved wall portion 9316 is maintained. Therefore, the attractive force generated between the fixed magnet Ma2 and the rotation resistance during pedal operation can be ensured.

  On the other hand, when the pedal operation is performed quickly (at a predetermined speed or more) from the state shown in FIG. 49A in such a manner that the tilting device 9310 is displaced, the moving magnet Ma9 has a centrifugal force as shown in FIG. Due to this action, the attraction force generated between the moving magnet Ma9 and the fixed magnet Ma2 during the movement of the tilting device 9310 can be made small enough to be ignored. That is, the rotational resistance at the time of pedal operation can be reduced.

  Therefore, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 9310 can be changed according to the displacement speed of the tilting device 9310 during pedal operation. According to the present embodiment, when the operation is performed slowly, the rotational resistance is increased by the magnetic force, so that the operation for maintaining the tilting device 9310 at a predetermined position is facilitated, and when the tilting device 9310 is operated quickly, the magnetic force is applied. By reducing the rotation resistance, it is possible to reduce the operation burden felt by the player by reducing the load felt when the player pushes the tilting device 9310 all at once.

  When the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 49 (b), the tilting device 9310 starts a return operation toward the initial position. This returning operation occurs at various speeds depending on the configuration of the torsion spring 9343, and is a mode in which rotation and translation occur simultaneously.

  That is, when the displacement in the rotational direction of the torsion spring 9343 returns, the tilting device 9310 operates in the rotational direction along the arrow Ta, and one arm portion 9343a of the torsion spring 9343 is pressed against the pushback wall portion 9361h. Returning the displacement caused by the movement of the tilting device 9310 in the translation direction along the arrow Tb.

  Here, as described above, when the tilting device 9310 is rotated from the raised position, the rotation operation is performed first, the translation operation is performed from the position where the tilting device 9310 is locked, and the rotation operation is finally performed. Thus, the operation stage was clearly divided. On the other hand, the returning operation of the tilting device 9310 is a mixed operation of the rotating operation that occurs along the arrow Ta and the translation operation that occurs along the arrow Tb. Therefore, the path along which the tilting device 9310 moves when the tilting device 9310 is pushed in can be different from the path along which the tilting device 9310 moves when the tilting device 9310 returns.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 50, the elastic coefficient of the torsion spring 9343 is such that contact between the notch surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 and the locking plane 9371a on the back side (right side in FIG. 50) is avoided. Is adjusted.

  Accordingly, the tilting device 9310 can be returned at the same speed without stopping during the return while maintaining the action of stopping the tilting device 9310 in the middle of the movement range at the time of pushing. Compared to the above, the time required for the return operation from the lowered position to the raised position can be shortened.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player when operating the tilting device 310 is switched between the reaction force generated by the torsion spring 343 and the reaction force generated by the coil spring 362b has been described. The operation device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment is configured such that the movable end member 10362d that supports the lower end portion of the coil spring 362b is movable, so that the amount of operation for operating the tilting device 310 by the pedal and the tilting device 310 after the operation are increased. The amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b can be changed in the case where the positions of the two are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 51A and 51B are partial cross-sectional views taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A of the operation device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment. 51A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal and the action claw portion 332 starts to contact the end portion of the piston member 362a. FIG. 51B shows the state shown in FIG. The state where the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating the pedal by a predetermined angle from the state shown is illustrated. 51A shows a state in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 51A, first position), and in FIG. 51B, the stepped member 10362f is on the rear side. A state of being arranged at (second position on the right side of FIG. 51 (b)) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the operation device 10300 includes the tilting device 310 described above and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below. The tilting member between the lower case 10360 that forms the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 10360 that has a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side and is disposed facing the lower case 10360. In a manner in which 310 is arranged, the lower case 10360 is fastened and fixed and abuts with the tilting device 310 to determine the rising position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). An upper case 370 (see FIG. 9) is mainly provided.

  The lower case 10360 will be described. The lower case 10360 is supported by a bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with an open top, and assembled to the bottom receiving member 361 from below and movable in the vertical direction (FIG. 51 (a) vertical direction). An urging device 10362 having a piston member 362a and a power application device 363 in which members that are fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and supplied with power are collectively disposed.

  The biasing device 10362 is a device that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 310 through the action claw portion 332, and is supported on the inner side of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c so as to be operable in the vertical direction and is opened downward. A piston member 362a having a shape, a coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal The bottom cover member 362c fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 in a manner to perform the above, and the moving end supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be able to contact the coil spring 362b from the lower end side so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The member 10362d and the movable end member 10362d and the bottom cover member 362c are disposed between the member 10362d and the movable end member 10362d. A first position close to the moving end member 10362d and a position far from the moving end member 10362d from a return spring 10362e to be biased and a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d (front-rear direction, FIG. 51 (a) left-right direction). A stepped member 10362f that is movable between the second position and a drive that is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 and that drives the stepped member 10362f along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. A solenoid SOL10 is mainly provided.

  Since the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d are orthogonal to each other in the operation direction, it is possible to suppress an impact generated when the stepped member 10362f is moved in the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a load from being generated directly on the moving end member 10362d by driving the drive solenoid SOL10.

  The stepped member 10362f, the moving end member 10362d, and the tilting device 310 are interposed via a coil spring 362b during transmission of a load. Therefore, even if the player performs a violent operation such as hitting the tilting device 310, the transmission speed of the load transmitted to the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d and due to the action of the coil spring 362b as the buffer material Since the size can be reduced, the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d can be prevented from being damaged.

  The moving end member 10362d is a portion that faces the stepped member 10362f, and the upper surface that contacts the coil spring 362b is formed in a planar shape perpendicular to the moving direction (vertical direction) and protrudes toward the stepped member 10362f. A locking portion 10362d1 is provided. In the moving end member 10362d, the moving amount from the upper end position (see FIG. 51A) to the lower end position (see FIG. 54) is set to be equal to the moving amount of the piston member 362a.

  The amount of protrusion of the locked portion 10362d is defined in relation to the stepped member 10362f. That is, when the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position, the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position while interfering with the moving end member 10362d viewed in the movement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51 (a)). In this case, the amount of protrusion is such that it does not overlap in the direction of movement of the moving end member 10362d (the vertical direction in FIG. 51 (a)).

  Therefore, in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the moving end member 10362d is locked with the stepped member 10362f in the vertical direction, while in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position. The moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 10362f and moves up and down in conjunction with the pedal operation of the tilting device 310.

  The return spring 10362e is formed of a spring member having an extremely small elastic coefficient as compared with the coil spring 362b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal in a state in which the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position and the movable end member 10362d can freely move up and down, the coil spring 362b is operated. First, the return spring 10362e expands and contracts (the return spring 10362e expands and contracts while the coil spring 362b is maintained at a natural length).

  On the other hand, the return spring 10362e is attached larger than the total weight of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d when the moving end member 10362d is disposed at the upper end position (see FIG. 51A). Designed to generate power. Therefore, when the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 51B and the player releases the hand, the moving end member 10362d returns to the upper end position by the urging force of the return spring 10362e.

  Thus, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the player releases the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, and moves downward in conjunction with the player performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. In other words, the moving end member 10362d is displaced as the player pushes the tilting device 310.

  The stepped member 10362f includes a plate-like main body portion BD extending vertically and a plurality of projecting portions (in order from the upper side) protruding forward from the main body portion BD (left side in FIG. 51 (a)). 1 protrusion part MT1, 2nd protrusion part MT2, and 3 protrusion part MT3).

  The projecting parts MT1 to MT3 are aligned adjacent to the side surface of the main body part BD in the vertical direction, and the vertical dimensions on the base side are equal. That is, as shown in FIG. 51A, the protrusions MT1 to MT3 are arranged in the respective regions (upper region BDU, middle region BDM, and lower region BDB) that divide the vertical dimension of the main body BD into three equal parts. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the lower end position of the upper area BDU coincides with the upper end position of the middle area BDM, and the lower end position of the middle area BDM coincides with the upper end position of the lower area BDB.

  The first protrusion MT1 extends from the upper end position of the upper region BDU and tilts downward toward the front, and the first protrusion MT1a extends from the lower end position of the upper region BDU and tilts upward toward the front. 1 guide surface MT1b, which mainly intersects at the intersection position C1 of the protruding tip.

  The first locking surface MT1a and the first guide surface MT1b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position.

  For example, when the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed above the intersecting position C1, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 moves to the first position. The leading end of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the upper end side of the first locking surface MT1a and at the same time the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the first locking surface MT1a. To reach. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the first locking surface MT1a in the state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained at the same position.

  Further, for example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed below the intersection position C1 and above the lower end position of the first guide surface MT1b. Accordingly, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the first guide surface MT1b, and at the same time when the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is the first guide. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT1b. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by a second locking surface MT2a described later in a state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member via the coil spring 362b. Even if it is given to 10362d, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its position.

  The intersection position C1 is set to a position that is lowered from the upper end position of the upper area BDU by a dimension that is 1/5 of the vertical dimension of the upper area BDU.

  The second protrusion MT2 extends from the upper end position of the middle region BDM and is inclined downward toward the front, and the second locking surface MT2a extends from the lower end position of the middle region BDM and rises and slopes toward the front. 2 guide surfaces MT2b, which intersect each other at the intersection position C2 of the protruding tip.

  The second locking surface MT2a and the second guide surface MT2b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position.

  For example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed below the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a and above the intersection position C2. Accordingly, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the upper end side of the second locking surface MT2a, and the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 reaches the second position at the same time as the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position. It reaches the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the stop surface MT2a. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the second locking surface MT2a in a state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained at the same position.

  For example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed below the intersecting position C2 and above the lower end position of the second guide surface MT2b. Accordingly, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the second guide surface MT2b, and the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 reaches the second position at the same time as the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT2b.

  In addition, since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by a third locking surface MT3a described later in a state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member via the coil spring 362b. Even if it is given to 10362d, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its position.

  The intersection position C2 is set to a position that is lowered from the upper end position of the middle area BDM by a dimension that is 2/5 of the vertical dimension of the middle area BDM. That is, the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the intersection position C2 is larger than the vertical dimension (movement direction of the moving end member 10362f) from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the intersection position C1. The direction dimension is set larger.

  The third protrusion MT3 extends from the upper end position of the lower region BDB and is inclined downward as it goes forward, and the third protrusion MT3 extends from the lower end position of the lower region BDB and rises upward as it goes forward. 3 guide surfaces MT3b, which intersect each other at the intersection position C3 of the protruding tip.

  The third locking surface MT3a and the third guide surface MT3b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position.

  For example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed below the upper end position of the third locking surface MT2a and above the intersection position C3. Accordingly, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the upper end side of the third locking surface MT3a, and the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 reaches the third position at the same time when the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position. It reaches the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the stop surface MT3a. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the third locking surface MT3a in a state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained at the same position.

  Further, for example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed below the intersection position C3 and above the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b. Accordingly, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the third guide surface MT2b, and at the same time when the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is the third guide. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT3b.

  Note that the moving end member 10362d is supported by the bottom cover member 362c in a state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position (since the bottom cover member 362c is formed in a shape that supports the moving end member 10362d, Even if a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its position.

  The intersection position C3 is set to a position that is lowered from the upper end position of the lower region BDB by a dimension that is 3/5 of the vertical dimension of the lower region BDB. That is, the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a to the intersecting position C3 is larger than the vertical dimension (moving direction of the moving end member 10362f) from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the intersecting position C2. The direction dimension is set larger.

  Therefore, the vertical dimension from the upper end position of each region BDU, BDM, BDB to the corresponding intersection position C1-C3 increases as it goes downward. That is, the amount of movement required for the moving end member 10362d to pass through the intersection positions C1 to C3 while the stepped member 10362f is retracted to the second position can be increased toward the lower region.

  Thus, when the stepped member 10362f performs control to reciprocate between the first position and the second position at regular intervals, it corresponds to the operation speed when the player pedals the tilting device 310. Thus, the position at which the moving end member 10362d is locked can be changed, and the load applied to the player can be changed. Details will be described later.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a time change of the drive solenoid SOL10 in the first operation pattern. In the first operation pattern, the stepped member 10362f is maintained at the first position for 0.1 second by exciting the drive solenoid SOL10, and then the stepped member 10362f is moved by releasing the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10. By repeating the operation mode in which the second position is maintained for 0.2 seconds, the stepped member 10362f operates in a constant pattern.

  In this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is operated by a pedal (pushing operation from the state shown in FIG. 51 (a)) by a general player's force to reach the lowered position, it takes 0.6 seconds at the shortest. In this manner, the elastic coefficients of the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b are set.

  In addition, the displacement generated in the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position and is unlocked is generated in the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b as it is.

  As described above, the state change of the solenoid SOL10 occurs a plurality of times in 0.6 seconds required to fully operate the tilting device 310. Accordingly, even when the player operates the tilting device 310 at a high speed by a pedal operation (for example, an operation of fully hitting the tilting device 310), the stepped member 10362f is first once before the tilting device 310 reaches the lowered position. Placed in position. In other words, the moving end member 10362d does not move completely (moves from the upper end position to the lower end position) while the stepped member 10362f is maintained at the second position.

  Since the period during which the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position is shorter than the period required for the spring restoration, the amount of restoration of the coil spring 362c while the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position. Ignore about. That is, the moving amount of the moving end member 10362d is equal to the moving amount of the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position.

  Next, a case where the operation speed is smaller than a prescribed boundary value will be described as a first operation mode. Here, since the period in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersecting position C1 during that time, By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is again arranged at the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a.

  In the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 tilts about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the intersection position C1 is 1/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 second is smaller than 1.4 degrees. In the case of the first operation mode in which the operation speed (first speed V1), in other words, the time until the tilting device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is longer than 3 seconds, the locked portion 10362d1 is The upper end position is maintained.

  In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained in the upper end position (see FIG. 51A), the moving amount of the tilting device 310 is equal to the displacement of the coil spring 362b. In this embodiment, in this case, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 is maximized.

  On the other hand, when the tilt angle per 0.2 second is operated at an operation speed greater than 1.4 degrees, in other words, when the time until the tilt device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is shorter than 3 seconds. The to-be-latched part 10362d1 can move below the intersection position C1.

  Next, the second operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a partial cross-sectional view taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. FIG. 53A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle pedal operation from the state shown in FIG. 51B, and the stepped member 10362f is the front side (the left side of FIG. 53A, the first The state of being arranged at (position) is illustrated. In the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. 53A, the moving end member 10362d can move to the upper end position of the second protrusion MT2.

  Here, since the period during which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersecting position C2 during that time, As the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed at the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

  In the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 tilts about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the intersection position C2 is 2/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 second is larger than 1.4 degrees. And an operation speed lower than 2.8 degrees (second speed V2), in other words, an operation speed in which the time until the tilting device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than 3 seconds. In the case of the second operation mode operated in step (a), the locked portion 10362d1 can move to the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

  In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position (see FIG. 53A) of the second locking surface MT2a, the displacement of the coil spring 362b becomes smaller than the moving amount of the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 is smaller than in the case where the operation is performed in the first operation mode.

  Next, the third operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 10300 along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle pedal operation from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a) and the stepped member 10362f is on the front side (the left side of FIG. 53 (b), the first The state of being arranged at (position) is illustrated. In the third operation mode, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the moving end member 10362d can move to the upper end position of the third protrusion MT3.

  Here, since the period during which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersecting position C3 during that time, As the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged at the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a.

  In the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 tilts about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the intersection position C3 is 3/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 second is larger than 2.8 degrees. In addition, the operation speed (third speed V3) smaller than 4.2 degrees, in other words, the time until the tilting device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is longer than 1.0 second and shorter than 1.5 seconds. In the case of the third operation mode operated at the operation speed, the locked portion 10362d1 can move to the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a.

  In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a (see FIG. 53B), the displacement of the coil spring 362b is less than the second moving amount of the tilting device 310. It becomes smaller than the operation mode. Therefore, when operating in the third operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the attitude of the tilting device 310 is smaller than when operating in the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

  Next, the fourth operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 54 shows a state where the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle pedal operation from the state shown in FIG. 53 (b) and the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 54, first position). The state is illustrated. In the fourth operation mode, as shown in FIG. 54, the moving end member 10362d can move to the lower end position of the third protrusion MT3. In the state shown in FIG. 54, since the piston member 362a and the moving end member 10362d are disposed at the lower end position, the displacement of the coil spring 362b has returned to the state at the start of pedal operation (see FIG. 51 (a)). Therefore, when changing from the state shown in FIG. 53B to the state shown in FIG. 54, the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is greatly reduced.

  Here, since the period in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained below the intersecting position C3 during that time, As the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed at the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b.

  In the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 tilts about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the intersection position C3 is 3/15 of the vertical length of the main body part BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 second is larger than 4.2 degrees. In the case of the fourth operation mode in which the operation speed (fourth speed V4), in other words, the time until the tilting device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is operated at an operation speed shorter than 1.0 second, the locked portion 10362d1. Can move to the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b.

  In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the lower end position (see FIG. 54) of the third guide surface MT3b, the displacement of the coil spring 362b is smaller than the amount of movement of the tilting device 310 from the third operation mode. Will become smaller. Therefore, when operating in the fourth operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the attitude of the tilting device 310 compared to operating in the first operation mode, the second operation mode, or the third operation mode. Becomes smaller.

  In the above description, the phrase “can move to a predetermined position” includes, for example, a case where the moving end member 10362d can be moved to a predetermined position by performing a continuous hitting operation or the like during the effective pressing time.

  FIG. 55 shows the moving end member at the end of operation (when the tilting device 10310 is disposed at the lowered position) corresponding to a change in the time required to operate the tilting device 10310 from the raised position to the lowered position in the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the change of the position where 10362d can be arrange | positioned. In FIG. 55, the case where the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern will be described.

  In FIG. 55, the vertical axis shows the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d, and the horizontal axis shows the time required to operate the tilting device 10310 (assuming operation at a constant speed). In addition, since the deformation amount of the coil spring 362b is reduced as the disposition of the moving end member 10362d is lowered, the load (reaction force) applied to the player who operates the tilting device 10310 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern, the load applied to the player can be changed depending on the operation speed when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal. In other words, the reaction force applied to the player can be reduced as the operation speed increases (the time required for pedaling the tilting device 10310 decreases).

  This reduction of the reaction force is not caused by, for example, changing the amount of contraction of the coil spring 362b before the operation of the tilting device 310 in advance (not by changing the elastic coefficient), This is caused by changing the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b with respect to the operation amount.

  Therefore, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b can be changed in accordance with the player's operation timing. In other words, the load applied to the player can be changed according to the operation mode (the first operation mode to the fourth operation mode) while the state of the coil spring 362b is equal before the operation. Even when 362b is visible, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the reaction force changes in appearance.

  Further, when the operation pattern of the solenoid SOL10 is changed from the first operation pattern described above, the reaction force applied to the player may be changed in a manner different from the above-described manner even if operated in the same operation manner. .

  For example, unlike the first operation pattern, a second operation pattern in which the period during which the stepped member 10632f is maintained at the second position is 0.05 seconds will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a time change of the drive solenoid SOL10 in the second operation pattern. In the second operation pattern, the stepped member 10362f is maintained at the first position for 0.25 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL10, and then the stepped member 10362f is released by de-energizing the drive solenoid SOL10. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.05 seconds, the stepped member 10362f operates in a constant pattern.

  In the second operation pattern, as in the first operation pattern, excitation start points of the drive solenoid SOL10 occur at intervals of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, it can be difficult to grasp the difference between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern from the operation sound generated when the drive solenoid SOL10 is excited and the operation vibration.

  In the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 tilts about 21 degrees. The vertical dimension from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the tolerance position C1 is 1/15 of the vertical length of the main body part BD, and from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the intersection position C2. Since the vertical dimension is 2/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.05 second is larger than 1.4 degrees and smaller than 2.8 degrees, in other words, tilted. When the time until the pedal of the device 310 is fully operated is shorter than 0.75 seconds and longer than 0.375 seconds, the locked portion 10362d1 is maintained at the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even if a general player pedals the tilting device 310, it takes 0.6 seconds to fully operate the tilting device 310 to the lowered position. Therefore, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled according to the second operation pattern, even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the moving end member 10362d cannot be moved below the tolerance position C2.

  Further, even when the operation patterns are different, the difference in time for maintaining the stepped member 10632f at the second position is as short as 0.2 seconds or less. It can be difficult to notice.

  As described above, the state of the coil spring 362b does not change before the operation, and it is difficult to grasp the difference in the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 that switches the load applied to the player according to the operation mode by switching the operation pattern. From this point, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the difference in the magnitude of the load given to the player due to the difference in the game mode before the operation of the tilting device 310, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game Can be prevented from being removed.

  That is, for example, on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the drive after the message “Pit down the pedal! If the reaction force is smaller than usual! Opportunity!” Is displayed and the player is informed to operate the tilting device 310. The operation of the solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the MPU 201 in an arbitrary operation pattern, for example.

  Here, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled in the first operation pattern, it is more slowly for the player to operate the tilting device 310 (for example, to operate in the above-described fourth operation mode). Compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is operated (for example, the case where the tilting device 310 is operated in the first operation mode described above), the load applied to the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled in the second operation pattern, even if the player operates the tilting device 310, the moving end member 10362d does not reach the lower end position, and the second locking surface. Since the MT2a stays at the upper end position (see FIG. 53A), the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 becomes larger than when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern.

  In this case, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is higher than usual (compared to the case where the moving end member 10362d is locked at the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a of the stepped member 10362f). Although it is small, the reaction force is larger than when the drive solenoid SOL10 is operated in the first operation pattern, so there is no chance when the player recognizes the difference in load (so-called "" It was noticed that it was “Gase production”.

  The difference in reaction force can be noticed only by the player who pushes the tilting device 310 as informed, so the player can be prompted to push in the tilting device 310 according to the notification (player participation) Can improve motivation).

  By switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10, the reaction force corresponding to the operation speed of the player can be switched in a plurality of types, so that a plurality of types of loads can be returned to the player who has pushed in as informed. it can.

  These operation patterns may be switched, for example, while the display for urging the tilting device 310 is continued for a certain period on the third symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, an example of operation pattern switching will be described.

  For example, the third symbol display device 81 can dynamically display the timing of pushing in as another display together with a display prompting the tilting device 310 to be pressed such as “press the button” for a certain period of time. For example, a sphere that moves in the opposite direction on the same route is displayed, and an image display such as “When a sphere overlaps, press it hard” is displayed.

  The player's willingness to participate in the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved by switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 in synchronization with these displays.

  For example, in the first control example of the drive solenoid SOL10, the drive solenoid SOL10 is operated in the first operation pattern at the time or period when it is determined to be pushed in by display, and the second operation pattern in a short period before and after the operation solenoid SOL10. In other periods, the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is maintained, whereby the stepped member 10362f is maintained at the first position.

  Note that the first control example is executed, for example, in a case where a display that prompts the tilting device 310 to be pushed is performed in an effect performed with a change with a high expectation degree (for example, a big hit expectation degree of 60% or more).

  On the other hand, for example, in the second control example of the drive solenoid SOL10, in addition to the time or period when it is determined to be pushed by display, it operates in the second operation pattern in a short period before and after that, and in other periods the drive solenoid is operated. By maintaining the excitation of the SOL 10, the stepped member 10362f is maintained in the first position.

  Note that the second control example is executed, for example, in a case where a display that prompts the tilting device 310 to be pushed is performed in an effect that is performed with a change in which the degree of expectation is not large (for example, the degree of big hit expectation is less than 60%). .

  Therefore, if it can be grasped whether the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the first control example or the second control example, the degree of expectation can be grasped. On the other hand, in the first control example and the second control example, the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 is the same at the time when it is determined that it is time to push in or the time period is excluded.

  Accordingly, at the time or period when it is determined to be pushed in as desired, a mode other than performing the operation to push in as desired (e.g., the tilting device 310 is pushed in at a timing other than the time or period when it is determined to be pushed, Whether the drive solenoid SOL10 is operating in the first control example even if the tilting device 310 is operated at the first speed V1 at the time or period when it is determined to be pushed in, whether the drive solenoid SOL10 is operating in the first control example. It is impossible to grasp whether the operation is in the control example 2. Thereby, a player's concentration power with respect to operation of the tilting apparatus 310 can be improved, and a player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the driving solenoid SOL10 operates in the first control example or the second control example and the push of the tilting device 310 is detected by the various sensors S1 to S3, after a predetermined time has elapsed ( For example, after one second has elapsed, the drive solenoid SOL10 is maintained in an excited state (the control mode is shifted to a control mode different from the first control example or the second control example).

  For this reason, if the tilting device 310 is accidentally pushed before the time or period when it is determined to be pushed in, the drive solenoid may be driven even if the tilting device 310 is pushed again at the time or period when it is supposed to be pushed. It cannot be distinguished whether the operation of the SOL 10 is the first control example or the second control example. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the pushing operation before the pushing timing of the tilting device 310, and to improve the concentration of the player who operates the tilting device 310.

  On the other hand, the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is performed in a case where an announcement prompting the pushing of the tilting device 310 is performed or an announcement not prompting the pushing is not performed (in the case of a demo screen, etc.) in an extremely low level of expectation. Control for releasing for a long time (maintaining the stepped member 10362f in the second position) may be performed. In this case, the moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d descends in conjunction with the pushing of the tilting device 310, regardless of the difference in the operation mode, so that the coil spring 362b is expanded or contracted. Almost does not occur. Therefore, the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be minimized. Thereby, the reaction force given to the player by the operation (trial push etc.) of the tilting device 310 when the degree of expectation is low can be reduced, and the player's feeling of fatigue for the operation can be reduced.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player when operating the tilting device 310 is switched between the reaction force generated by the torsion spring 343 and the reaction force generated by the coil spring 362b has been described. The operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the movable end member 10362d that supports the lower end portion of the coil spring 362b is movable, whereby the operation amount for operating the tilting device 310 by the pedal, and the tilting device 310 after the operation. The amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b can be changed in the case where the positions of the two are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 57A and 57B are partial cross-sectional views taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A of the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment. 57 (a) shows a state where the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal and the action claw portion 332 starts to contact the end of the piston member 362a. FIG. 57 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 57 (a). The state where the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating the pedal by a predetermined angle from the state shown is illustrated. FIG. 57A shows a state in which the stepped member 11362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57A), and FIG. 57B shows the stepped member 11362f in the rear side (FIG. The state of arrangement on the right side b) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the operation device 11300 includes the above-described tilting device 310 and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and tilts. The tilting member between the lower case 11360 that forms the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 11360 that has a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side and is disposed facing the lower case 11360. 310 is fastened and fixed to the lower case 11360 in a manner in which it is disposed, and the rising position of the tilting device 310 is determined by contacting with the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 contacts the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). An upper case 370 (see FIG. 9) is mainly provided.

  The lower case 11360 will be described. The lower case 11360 is a bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper part opened, and is assembled to the bottom receiving member 361 from below and supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction (FIG. 57 (a) vertical direction). An urging device 11362 having a piston member 362a and a power application device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and supplied with electric power are arranged.

  Like the biasing device 10362 described in the tenth embodiment, the biasing device 11362 is a device that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 310 through the action claw portion 332, and the inner side of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c is vertically moved. A bottomed cylindrical piston member 362a that is operably supported and opened downward, a coil spring 362b that is accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a highly rigid material such as metal The bottom cover member 362c is fastened and fixed to the bottom support member 361 in such a manner as to cover the lower opening of the cylindrical receiver 361c, and is arranged so as to be able to contact the coil spring 362b from the lower end side. , A moving end member 10362d supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be slidable, and the moving end member 10362d and the bottom cover member 362. A return spring 10362e that is disposed between the movable end member 10362d and urges the moving end member 10362d upward, in addition to a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d (front-rear direction, FIG. a) a stepped member 11362f that is movable between a first position close to the moving end member 10362d and a second position far from the moving end member 10362d and the bottom receiving member 361 from the left and right direction). And a drive solenoid SOL11 for driving the stepped member 11362f along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d.

  Since the stepped member 11362f and the moving end member 10362d are orthogonal to each other in the operation direction, it is possible to suppress an impact generated when the stepped member 11362f moves in the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a load from being generated directly on the moving end member 10362d by driving the drive solenoid SOL11.

  The moving end member 10362d is a portion facing the stepped member 11362f, and includes a locked portion 10362d1 protruding toward the stepped member 11362f.

  The amount of protrusion of the locked portion 10362d is defined in relation to the stepped member 11362f. That is, when the stepped member 11362f is disposed at the first position, the stepped member 11362f is disposed at the second position while interfering with the moving end member 10362d viewed in the movement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 57 (a)). In such a case, the amount of protrusion does not overlap when viewed in the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d (vertical direction in FIG. 57 (a)).

  Accordingly, in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, the moving end member 10362d is locked with the stepped member 11362f in the vertical direction, while in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the second position. The moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 11362f and moves up and down in conjunction with the pedal operation of the tilting device 310.

  The return spring 10362e is formed of a spring member having an extremely small elastic coefficient as compared with the coil spring 362b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal in a state where the stepped member 11362f is disposed at the second position and the movable end member 10362d can freely move up and down, the coil spring 362b is operated. First, the return spring 10362e expands and contracts (the return spring 10362e expands and contracts while the coil spring 362b is maintained at a natural length).

  On the other hand, the return spring 10362e is attached larger than the total weight of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d when the moving end member 10362d is disposed at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A). Designed to generate power. Therefore, when the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 57B and the player releases the hand, the moving end member 10362d returns to the upper end position by the urging force of the return spring 10362e.

  Thus, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the player releases the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, and moves downward in conjunction with the player performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. In other words, the moving end member 10362d is displaced as the player pushes the tilting device 310.

  The stepped member 11362f includes a plate-like main body portion BD extending vertically and a plurality of projecting portions projecting from the main body portion BD toward the front (left side in FIG. 57 (a)). A protrusion MTU and a lower protrusion MTB).

  The projecting portions MTU and MTB are aligned on the side surface of the main body portion BD with a space in the vertical direction, and the shape of the portion projecting from the front side surface of the main body portion BD to the front side is made equal. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the main body BD includes respective regions (upper half region BDHU and lower half region BDHB) that divide the vertical dimension into two equal parts, and in this embodiment, the lower end position of the upper half region BDHU. And the upper end position of the lower half area BDHB coincide with each other. Each of the protrusions MTU and MTB is arranged in the upper half area BDHU arranged on the upper side among these areas.

  The upper protruding portion MTU extends from the upper end position of the upper half region BDHU and slopes downward toward the front. The upper protruding portion MTU extends downward from the upper end position of the upper half region. The lower horizontal surface MT11b extending in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d from the position lowered by the dimension of / 10 mainly to the front side, which intersects at the intersecting position C11 of the protruding tip To do. That is, the intersection position C11 is arranged at a position that is lowered from the upper end position of the main body part BD by 1/10 of the vertical dimension of the main body part BD.

  The upper locking surface MT11a has a function of defining the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 11362f is disposed at the first position. For example, when the stepped member 11362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed above the intersection position C11, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 moves. At the same time that the stepped member 11362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is brought to the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the upper locking surface MT11a. To reach. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the upper locking surface MT11a in the state where the stepped member 11362f is disposed at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if it is made, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its position.

  Further, for example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed below the intersecting position C11 and above the intersecting position C12 described later, the moving end member 10362d is positioned at the intermediate position (see FIG. 57 (b), In the case where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, it is not supported at all until it reaches the position supported by the lower protruding portion MTB). Thus, it can be freely moved up and down.

  The lower protrusion MTB has an upper stop surface MT11a of the upper protrusion MTU, starting from an intersection of a point extending horizontally from the lower end position of the upper half area BDHU to the front side and a point extending vertically downward from the intersection position C11. An upper locking surface MT12a extending toward the main body BD at the same inclination angle (in other words, extending downwardly from the main body BD toward the above-described intersection) and the upper half area BDHU A lower horizontal plane MT12b extending in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d from the lower end position to the front side is mainly provided, and these intersect at an intersection position C12 of the protruding tip. That is, the intersection position C12 coincides with the intermediate position of the main body BD (the lower end position of the upper half area BDHU) in the horizontal direction. Further, the intersection position C11 and the intersection position C12 coincide in the vertical direction.

  The upper locking surface MT12a has a function of defining the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 11362f is disposed at the first position.

  For example, in the state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed below the intersection position C11 and above the intersection position C12, when the stepped member 11362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is on the upper side. The locking surface MT12a can be locked at the upper end position (root position, rear end position). Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the upper locking surface MT12a in the state where the stepped member 11362f is disposed at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if it is made, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its position.

  Further, for example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is disposed below the intersection position C12 (see FIGS. 59A and 59B), the moving end member 10362d is the moving end member 10362d. Since it is not supported at all until it reaches the lower end position, it can be freely moved in the vertical direction according to the operation amount of the tilting device 310.

  Here, the movable range of the moving end member 10362d in the vertical direction is equivalent to the movable range in which the piston member 362a moves in the vertical direction when the tilting device 310 is pedaled (the tilting device 310 is pedaled to the lower end position). When the moving end member 10362d is disposed at the lower end position when operated, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is not different from the state shown in FIG.

  That is, in a state where the locked portion 10362d is disposed below the intersection position C12, the game is performed via the tilting device 310 regardless of the degree of pedal operation of the tilting device 310 (the pushing angle of the tilting device 310). The biasing force (reaction force) of the coil spring 362b applied to the person does not change.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the moving end member 10362b is disposed on the upper side of the lower protrusion MTB, the reaction force caused by the coil spring 362b increases as the degree of pedal operation increases. When the moving end member 10362b is disposed below the lower protrusion MTB, the reaction force caused by the coil spring 362b is reduced to the magnitude before the pedal operation.

  Therefore, the type of load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is such that the moving end member 10362b is disposed on the upper side of the lower protrusion MTB, and the degree to which the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal (tilt angle) increases. The first load in a state in which the amount of displacement of the spring 362b increases and the reaction force changes (reaction force change state, see FIG. 57 (a) or FIG. 57 (b)), and the moving end member 10362b is located on the lower protrusion MTB. Regardless of the degree to which the tilting device 310 is pedaled, the amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b does not change and the reaction force changes to be substantially the same (the change in the reaction force of the torsion spring 343 and the return spring 10362e remains). It is switched between the second load in the state (the reaction force unchanged state, see FIG. 59A or 59B).

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a time change of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the third operation pattern. In the third operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the first position for 0.6 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL11, and then the stepped member 11362f is released by de-energizing the drive solenoid SOL11. By repeating the operation mode in which the second position is maintained for 0.2 seconds, the stepped member 11362f operates in a constant pattern.

  In this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is operated by a pedal (pushing operation from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a)) by a general player's force to reach the lowered position (see FIG. 59 (b)). The elastic coefficients of the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b are set in a mode that requires 0.6 seconds at the shortest.

  In addition, the displacement generated in the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 11362f is disposed at the second position and the lock is released is generated as it is in the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b.

  As described above, in the third operation pattern by the solenoid SOL11, the tilting device 310 moves by a half distance of the moving range during the period (0.2 seconds) in which the stepped member 11362f is maintained in the retracted state. It is shorter than the required period (0.3 seconds) (0.2 s <0.3 s). Therefore, the player has pushed the tilting device 310 at the highest speed (operated for 0.6 seconds to the lower end position) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A). However, the moving end member 10362d does not move to the lower side of the lower protrusion MTB while the stepped member 11362f moves from the first position to the second position and again moves to the first position.

  In addition, the stepped member 11362f is not arranged at the second position a plurality of times in 0.6 seconds, which is the minimum necessary to fully operate the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 at the highest speed (operates for 0.6 seconds to the lower end position) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57 (a)) The stepped member 11362f is not arranged at the second position a plurality of times during pushing.

  Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 at the highest speed (operates for 0.6 seconds to the lower end position) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57 (a)) Regardless of the push-in timing, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is the first load (reaction force change state) described above.

  On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is pushed down to the lower end position from the state shown in FIG. 57A over a time longer than 0.6 seconds, a plurality of stepped members 11362f are in the second position during the operation. In some cases, the movable end member 10362d may move to the lower side of the lower protrusion MTB. Hereinafter, an operation mode (conditional slow operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 is pushed to the lower end position over a time longer than 0.6 seconds will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 59A and 59B are partial cross-sectional views taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A of the operation device 11300. FIG. FIG. 59 (a) shows a state where the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle pedal operation from the state shown in FIG. 57 (b), and FIG. 59 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 59 (a). The state where the tilting device 310 is operated by a predetermined angle pedal and reaches the lower end position is illustrated.

  As described above, when the moving end member 10362d is supported by the protrusions MTU and MTB, the upper and lower positions between the upper surface of the moving end member 10362d and the lower horizontal planes MT11b and MT12b directly below the moving end member 10362d. The minimum passing distance HMI, which is the distance in the direction, is a distance that is 1/10 of the movable range of the moving end member.

  For example, when the descent starts from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A), the movement of the moving end member 10362d while the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the second position. When the amount is less than the minimum passing distance HMI, the stepped member 11362f moves to the first position, and the moving end member 10362d moves up to a position supported by the upper protruding portion MTU.

  In the third operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the second position for 0.2 seconds, so that the minimum passage distance HMI can be passed during that time (in other words, the time until the pedal operation is completed is 2.0. When the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at an operation passing speed that is shorter than a second (conditional slow speed), the moving end member 10362d is disposed on the lower side through the lower protrusion MTB during the operation. There is a possibility (see FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b)).

  Therefore, when the player pedals the tilting device 310 at the above-described conditionally slow operating speed (the operation speed until the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed is shorter than 2.0 seconds), the player operates the tilting device 310 via the tilting device 310. The load (reaction force) given to the player is the above-described second load (reaction force invariant state).

  FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a change in the type of reaction force applied to the player corresponding to a change in time required for pedaling the tilting device 11310 from the raised position to the lowered position in the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 60, the vertical axis indicates the type of reaction force (first load, second load, first load or second load), and the horizontal axis indicates the time required to operate the tilting device 11310 (at a constant speed). Assuming the case of operation) is shown in a plot every 0.1 seconds.

  The “first load or second load” on the vertical axis indicates a case where the first load or the second load may be used depending on the timing of starting the pedal operation. For example, when the time required to operate the tilting device 11310 is 0.8 seconds, when the pedal operation is started at the timing when the drive solenoid SOL11 changes to the first position (the timing at the left end in FIG. 58), 0. Since the drive solenoid SOL11 is arranged only once in the second position until 8 seconds elapses, the kind of reaction force given to the player becomes the first load, while the drive solenoid SOL11 is arranged in the second position. When the pedal operation is started after 0.1 second, the drive solenoid SOL11 is arranged twice at the second position until 0.8 seconds elapses, and the time maintained in the arrangement passes the minimum passing distance HMI. Since it is set to 0.1 seconds longer than 0.08 seconds required for the player, the kind of reaction force given to the player is the second load.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the pedal operation that becomes the first load or the second load, in the present embodiment, the reaction force change state may occur through the reaction force change state, but the reaction force invariant state passes. There is no reaction force change state. This is apparent from the reaction force changing state when the moving end member 10362d is disposed above the intersecting position C12 and the reaction force unchanged state when the moving end member 10362d is disposed below the intersecting position C12. From this, in the pedal operation that becomes the first load or the second load, it is possible to commonly cause an action of reducing the reaction force during the pedal operation.

  As described above, when the drive solenoid SOL11 operates in the third operation pattern, the player can change the operation speed (time required to operate the tilting device 11310) when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal. The load given to can be changed. In other words, when the operation speed is near the maximum (the operation speed near the operation speed in which the time required for completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is 0.6 seconds), the operation speed is higher. The load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be increased as compared to the case where the speed is small (larger than the operation passing speed).

  The change in the reaction force is not caused by, for example, changing the contraction amount of the coil spring 362b before the operation of the tilting device 310 in advance (not by changing the elastic coefficient). This is caused by changing the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b with respect to the operation amount.

  Therefore, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b can be changed in accordance with the player's operation timing. In other words, the load applied to the player can be changed according to the operation mode while the state of the coil spring 362b is equivalent before the operation, so, for example, even if the coil spring 362b is visible, It is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the reaction force changes.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the time required for the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is shorter than 2.0 seconds, the load given to the player via the tilting device 310 is likely to change to the second load. Thus, when the time is 2.0 seconds or longer, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is maintained at the first load.

  Therefore, when it is desired to reduce the reaction force returned to the player by slowly operating the tilting device 310, it is necessary to prevent the pedal operation over 2.0 seconds. For example, by setting the effective period of pedal operation of the tilting device 310 to less than 2.0 seconds and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4), the player can operate the pedal within 2.0 seconds. Can be promoted. Thereby, it can suppress that a player performs pedal operation of the inclination apparatus 310 over 2.0 second or more.

  Further, when the operation pattern of the solenoid SOL10 is changed from the above-described third operation pattern, the reaction force applied to the player may be changed in a manner different from the above-described manner even if the operation manner is the same. .

  For example, unlike the third operation pattern, a fourth operation pattern in which the period during which the stepped member 11632f is maintained at the second position is 0.1 seconds will be described.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a time change of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the fourth operation pattern. In the fourth operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the first position for 0.7 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL11, and then the stepped member 11362f is released by de-energizing the drive solenoid SOL11. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.1 second, the stepped member 11362f operates in a constant pattern.

  In the fourth operation pattern, as in the third operation pattern, excitation start points of the drive solenoid SOL11 occur at intervals of 0.8 seconds. Therefore, it can be difficult to grasp the difference between the third operation pattern and the fourth operation pattern from the operation sound generated when the drive solenoid SOL11 is excited and the operation vibration.

  As described above, when the moving end member 10362d is supported by the protrusions MTU and MTB, the upper and lower positions between the upper surface of the moving end member 10362d and the lower horizontal planes MT11b and MT12b directly below the moving end member 10362d. The minimum passing distance HMI, which is the distance in the direction, is a distance that is 1/10 of the movable range of the moving end member.

  For example, when the descent starts from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A), the movement of the moving end member 10362d while the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the second position. When the amount is less than the minimum passing distance HMI, the stepped member 11362f moves to the first position, and the moving end member 10362d moves up to a position supported by the upper protruding portion MTU.

  In the fourth operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the second position for 0.1 seconds, and thus the minimum passage distance HMI can be passed during that time (in other words, 1.0 pedaling is completed until the pedal operation is completed). When the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at a second operation passing speed which is an operation speed shorter than the second (slow speed with the second condition), the moving end member 10362d passes through the lower protrusion MTB in the middle of the operation. (See FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b)).

  Therefore, when the player pedals the tilting device 310 at the above-mentioned slow operating speed with the second condition (the operation speed until the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed is shorter than 1.0 second), the tilting device 310 is Thus, the load (reaction force) applied to the player is the second load (reaction force invariant state) described above. In other words, when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at the remaining operation speed excluding the second operation passing speed among the operation passing speeds, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is as described above. Since the first load (reaction force change state) is set, this point differs from the third operation pattern.

  That is, even when the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is the same, the driving solenoid SOL11 is operated according to the third operating pattern or the driving solenoid SOL11 is operated according to the fourth operating pattern via the tilting device 310. Thus, the load (reaction force) given to the player changes.

  Even if the operation patterns are different, the difference in time for maintaining the stepped member 11632f in the second position is as short as 0.1 second or less, so that the player may be affected by the difference in appearance and operation sound. It can be difficult to notice.

  As described above, the state of the coil spring 362b does not change before the operation, and it is difficult to grasp the difference in the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL11 that switches the load applied to the player according to the operation mode by switching the operation pattern. From this point, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the difference in the magnitude of the load given to the player due to the difference in the game mode before the operation of the tilting device 310, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game Can be prevented from being removed.

  That is, for example, in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the message “Push the pedal in for 1.5 seconds! If the reaction force is smaller than usual!” Is displayed, and the player is informed of the operation of the tilting device 310. The operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 after being performed is controlled by the MPU 201 in an arbitrary operation pattern, for example.

  Here, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is controlled in the third operation pattern, it is more likely that the player operates the tilting device 310 over 1.5 seconds than when the player operates the tilting device 310 (0.6 seconds). Compared to the case of performing an operation of moving the tilting device 310 to the lowered position), the load applied to the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is controlled in the fourth operation pattern, the player operates the tilting device 310 over 1.5 seconds and also operates the voluntary tilting device 310 (0.6 seconds). (When the operation of moving the tilting device 310 to the lowered position is performed), the load applied to the player is the same (the reaction force is larger than when the drive solenoid SOL11 is operated in the third operation pattern). ). Therefore, at the stage where the player who performed the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 recognizes the magnitude of the reaction force, it can be realized that there was no chance (so-called “gase effect”).

  The difference in reaction force can be noticed only by the player who pushes the tilting device 310 as informed, so the player can be prompted to push in the tilting device 310 according to the notification (player participation) Can improve motivation).

  By switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL11, the reaction force corresponding to the operation speed of the player can be switched in a plurality of types, so that a plurality of types of loads can be returned to the player who has pushed in as informed. it can.

  As a main object of the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is pedaled so that a player who notices the display hits at the end of the period when the third symbol display device 81 is prompted to push the tilting device 310. When operating, the reaction force may be increased to reduce the moving speed of the tilting device 310 when operating the pedal. For this reason, the operation control of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern described above is performed at the end of a period in which the third symbol display device 81 is prompted to push the tilting device 310 (for example, display Only during the period from 2 seconds before the end timing to the display end timing), and during other periods, the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is released and the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the second position. good.

  This reduces the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 in a period other than the final stage of the period in which the third symbol display device 81 displays that the tilting device 310 is pushed. Therefore, for example, when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal during a period other than the final stage (for example, immediately after the start of the period in which the display for prompting the pushing of the tilting device 310 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), It is possible to prevent a feeling of fatigue from being accumulated in a player who operates the tilting device 310 due to an excessive load. Thereby, the probability that a player refrains from operating the tilting device 310 can be lowered, and the willingness to participate in the game can be increased by operating the tilting device 310 as informed.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although the case where the shape of the tilting device 310 operated by the player is fixed has been described in the first embodiment, the operation device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment tilts the second tilting device 400 that can be operated by the player. It is connected to the device 12310 and is configured to be extendable and contractable in the radial direction of a circle around the rotation axis of the tilting device 12310. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 62 is a front perspective view of an operation device 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, the operation device 12300 includes a tilting device 12310 used in the same application as the tilting device 310 described above, the lower cover 320 described above in each of the embodiments, the shaft cover 330, and the shaft member 340. And a bending member 350, a lower case 360, and an upper case 370, and in addition to that, a second tilting device 400 that is newly provided in the present embodiment is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the second tilting device 400 is a device that is connected to the tilting device 12310 so as to straddle the tilting device 12310 from above and is formed in a U-shape in front view. The main operating method is a method of pushing the operating unit 440 extending in the left-right direction in the same direction as the operating direction of the tilting device 12310. In other words, in the present embodiment, the player can participate in the game not only in a mode in which the tilting device 12310 is pushed in, but also in a mode in which the second tilting device 400 is pushed in.

  63A is a front view of the operation device 12300, and FIG. 63B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 12300 taken along the line LXIIIb-LXIIIb in FIG. 63A.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, the second tilting device 400 is connected to the tilting device 12310 on both side surfaces of the tilting device 12310. Specifically, the tilting device 12310 includes the upper cover 12311 in which the upper cover 311 described above in each of the above embodiments is provided with an opening 12318 that opens toward the inside starting from both side surfaces. In the second tilting device 400, the support fixing portion 411 is fastened and fixed to the tilting device 12310 in a state where the fastening fixing portion 410 is inserted through the opening 12318 of the upper cover 12311.

  The load applied to the player when operating the tilting device 12310 or the second tilting device 400 varies depending on how far the player pushes the position away from the rotation axis O1, as shown in FIG. As shown, the outermost diameter point (the point farthest from the rotation axis O1) of the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 is formed by the curved wall portion 316 of the tilting device 12310 (the curved wall with the rotation axis O1 as the center). Formed on arc R12 (which is in contact with portion 316).

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 63B (the state in which the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 is disposed on the side close to the rotation axis O1), the reaction force applied to the player who operates the tilting device 12310 is described. The minimum value is equivalent to the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400.

  That is, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the side closer to the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310 (the left side in FIG. 63B) is the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400. On the other hand, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the side farther from the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310 (right side in FIG. 63 (b), near the curved wall portion 316) is the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400. It is equivalent to the reaction force given to the player who operates.

  In the present embodiment, the second tilting device 400 functions in a manner that reduces the reaction force applied to the player who operates the second tilting device 400 as compared with the case where the tilting device 12310 is operated. As a previous stage of the description, details of the second tilting device 400 will be described below.

  64 and 65 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 12300 along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 63 (b). 64 shows a shortened state of the second tilting device 400, and FIG. 65 shows an extended state of the second tilting device 400. Further, since the operation device 12300 is formed in a bilaterally symmetric shape, only the left side is shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, and the right side is not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the second tilting device 400 includes a fastening and fixing portion 410 that is fastened and fixed to the side surface of the tilting device 12310 in a state of being inserted through the opening 12318 of the tilting device 12310, and the fastening and fixing portion 410. A first arm portion 420 having a main body portion 421 extending in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis O1 and the radially outer side of the first arm portion 420. A second arm portion 430 that is disposed and connected to the second arm portion 420, a columnar operation portion 440 that connects the pair of second arm portions 430, and a base end side of the first arm portion 420 (rotation axis O1) A drive motor 450 that is disposed on the side close to the motor and is rotationally driven by energization, and a transmission that is pivotally supported by the first arm 420 in a manner that allows the drive force of the drive motor 450 to be transmitted to the second arm 430. Device 460 and drive motor 45 Of displaced by the phase difference in the rotating parts, mainly includes a vibration transmission member 470 close to and away from the weight member M1a of the drive motor M1, the.

  The fastening and fixing portion 410, the first arm portion 420, and the second arm portion 430 are in an assembled state by arranging a pair of horizontally reversed members facing each other in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. Reference). The operation unit 440 is inserted into the pair of left and right second arm portions 430 from the left and right directions.

  That is, the assembly procedure of the second tilting device 400 is as follows. First, the drive motor 450, the transmission device 460, and the vibration transmission member 470 are accommodated in one member of the first arm portion 420, and then the other member is fastened and fixed. As a result, after assembling the first arm portion 420, the second arm portion 430 is overlapped in such a manner that the second arm portion 430 is connected to the radially outer end of the first arm portion 420 in the assembled state. On the other hand, the sub-assembly is formed by stacking and fastening the fastening and fixing portions 410 in such a manner that the fastening and fixing portions 410 are connected to the opposite ends. This subassembly is formed as a pair of left and right.

  Next, when the formed subassembly is brought close to the tilting device 12310 from the side and the fastening fixing portion 410 is inserted into the opening portion 12318, the operation portion 440 is sandwiched between the second arm portions 430 on the left and right sides, thereby The tip of 440 is inserted into the fitting part 433 of the second arm part 430.

  Finally, by fastening and fixing the fastening fixing portion 410 to the tilting device 12310, the movement of the second arm portion 430 in the extending direction of the operation portion 440 is restricted, so that the operation portion 440 may fall off the subassembly. Thus, the assembly of the second tilting device 400 to the tilting device 12310 is completed.

  Next, details of each part will be described. The fastening and fixing portion 410 is an opening that supports the branch portion 425 of the first arm portion 420 and is fastened and fixed to the tilting device 12310, and an opening that is disposed opposite to the tip of the branch portion 425. An opening 412 is mainly provided.

  The opening 412 has a function as a passage route when a vibration transmission member 470, a harness or the like (not shown) wired to the drive motor 450 enters the inside of the tilting device 12310. Therefore, at least the opening is widened to a region where it does not interfere with the movement locus of the vibration transmission member 470, and a clearance is secured so as not to bite (not press) the harness or the like while the vibration transmission member 470 moves. Formed with.

  The first arm 420 is formed of a main body 421 formed as a substantially rectangular container having an open front side in FIG. 64, and the inner wall of the main body 421 toward the inner space of the main body 421. And a support wall 422 extending from the inner side wall of the main body 421 to a position evenly spaced from the drive shaft of the drive motor 450 supported by the support wall 422 in the left-right direction. A distal end support portion 424 that extends in the left-right direction from the distal end side end portion of the main body portion 421 and supports one end of the biasing spring SP1, and a proximal end side (lower side in FIG. 64) of the main body portion 421. And a branch portion 425 extending to the side close to the tilting device 12310.

  As for the main-body part 421, the length of the external width is shortened in the base end side compared with the front end side. That is, the main body 421 has a first facing surface 421a that is a surface opposed to the end of the second arm 430 in the shortened state of the second tilting device 400 (see FIG. 64). In the extended state (see FIG. 65), it is formed on the inner side of the main body part 421 with respect to the second facing surface 421b, which is a surface facing the end portion of the second arm portion 430. The first opposing surface 421a and the second opposing surface 421b are formed over the entire circumference of the first arm portion 420.

  In other words, the distance between the end portion of the second arm portion 430 and the main body portion 421 of the first arm portion 420 is shorter in the extended state than in the shortened state. The buffer action of load transmission between the two arms 430 is reduced.

  The support wall 422 is a substantially Z-shaped wall portion that is spaced apart from both the left and right side walls of the main body 421, and includes an outer support wall 422 a that supports the drive motor 450 per surface, and a vibration transmission member 470. And an inner support wall 422b for guiding and supporting the main body. Therefore, the support wall 422 has a plurality of functions including a function of fixing the position of the drive motor 450 and a function of stabilizing the position change of the vibration transmission member 470.

  The inner support wall 422b is formed as a wall bent in a substantially Z shape in FIG. 64. One end of the biasing spring SP3 of the vibration transmission member 470 is supported in a portion (intermediate portion) extending along the left-right direction in FIG. 64, and extends along the vertical direction in FIG. 64 (moving direction of the vibration transmission member 470). The vibration transmitting member 470 is guided and supported in the moving direction in a pair of portions (two surfaces connected to the intermediate portion).

  The extended shaft support portion 423 supports the transmission device 460 in a rotatable manner and prevents the transmission shaft bar 461 from being displaced in the axial direction. That is, the transmission shaft bar 461 is pivotally supported by the inner side surface of the extending shaft support portion 423 and facing the left-right direction, and the shift prevention ring 463 is locked by the surface facing the vertical direction.

  The tip support portion 424 is a portion that supports one end of the urging spring SP <b> 1, and the left and right direction outer end portions are portions that face the inner side surface of the second arm portion 430. The load transmission efficiency between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 varies depending on the distance between the left and right outer end portions of the tip support portion 424 and the inner surface of the second arm portion 430. That is, the shorter the interval, the higher the transmission efficiency.

  The branch portion 425 is formed in a half-pipe shape with the front side in FIG. 64 opened, like the main body portion 421. The branch portion 425 includes a protruding portion 425 a that protrudes from the outer surface of the tip portion, and the protruding portion 425 a is formed in a shape that is fitted into the fastening and fixing portion 410.

  In the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner surface of the fastening and fixing portion 410 supports the outer surface on the distal end side of the branch portion 425 so that the inside of the gap between the fastening and fixing portion 410 and the branch portion 425 is supported. 64, the length of the gap in the vertical direction of FIG. 64 (stretching direction of the second tilting device 400) compared to the length of the gap in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface (the direction perpendicular to the stretching direction of the second tilting device 400). Is set longer. Thereby, the 1st arm part 420 can make it easy to selectively vibrate with respect to the fastening fixing | fixed part 410 in FIG. 64 up-down direction (extension / contraction direction of the 2nd tilting apparatus 400).

  The second arm 430 is formed as a substantially rectangular container with the front side of FIG. 64 open, and is capable of accommodating the first arm 420 in a manner that protrudes to the base end (lower side in FIG. 64). Part 431, adjustment recess 432 that is recessed from the internal space of main body part 431 toward the tip side (upper side in FIG. 64), and insertion part 433 that is recessed along the left-right direction at the tip part of body part 431. And a base support portion 434 that extends inward in the left-right direction on the root side of the main body portion 431 and supports the end of the biasing spring SP1.

  As for the main-body part 431, compared with the front end side, the length of the inner shape width | variety is shortened by the base end side. That is, the main body 431 has a first facing surface 431a which is a surface opposed to the end of the first arm portion 420 in the shortened state of the second tilting device 400 (see FIG. 64). It is formed on the outer side of the main body 431 with respect to the second facing surface 431b which is a surface facing the end of the first arm portion 420 in the extended state (see FIG. 65). The first opposing surface 431a and the second opposing surface 431b are formed over the entire circumference of the second arm portion 430.

  In other words, the distance between the end portion of the first arm portion 420 and the main body portion 431 of the second arm portion 430 is shorter in the extended state than in the shortened state. The buffer action of load transmission between the two arms 430 is reduced.

  The adjustment recess 432 includes an inclined side surface 432a that is a wall surface that is formed to be inclined with respect to the drive shaft so as to pass through the drive shaft of the drive motor 450.

  The fitting portion 433 is formed as a recessed portion that is recessed in the left-right direction with an inner shape substantially equivalent to a cross-sectional shape orthogonal to the axis of the operation portion 440.

  The drive motor 450 includes a first cam 451 that is fixed to a drive shaft that is driven by energization. Details of the first cam 451 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The transmission device 460 includes a substantially cylindrical transmission shaft bar 461 that is pivotally supported by the first arm portion 420 so as to be rotatable in conjunction with the rotation of the drive motor 450, and a transmission shaft rod from the distal end of the transmission shaft bar 461. A distal end adjusting member 462 that is fitted so as not to rotate relative to the shaft, a displacement prevention ring 463 that is inserted in the transmission shaft rod 461 from the radial direction and fixed so as not to be displaced in the axial direction, and a proximal end of the transmission shaft rod 461 Is generated between the second cam 464 and the second cam 464 and the slip-preventing ring 463 so as to press the second cam 464 against the first cam 451. The biasing spring SP2 is mainly provided. A commercially available E-ring can be used for the slip prevention ring 463.

  FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the drive motor 450 and the transmission device 460. In FIG. 66, the case side portion of the drive motor 450 and the tip adjustment member 462 are not shown.

  The transmission shaft rod 461 has flat portions 461a and 461b that are axial wall portions extending in the axial direction along a plane perpendicular to the radial direction at both ends, and a diameter of the transmission shaft rod 461 with a width capable of fitting the slip prevention ring 463. And a recessed groove 461c that is recessed in a manner that reduces the width of the groove.

  The 1st flat part 461a arrange | positioned at the front end side of the 1st arm part 420 is a part which supports the front-end | tip adjustment member 462 so that rotation is impossible.

  The second flat portion 461b disposed on the proximal end side of the first arm portion 420 is a portion that supports the second cam 464 so as not to rotate and allows the second cam 464 to move in the axial direction. In other words, the second cam 464 can move in the axial direction within a range where the second flat portion 461b is formed, and on the other hand, when the second cam 464 tries to exceed the end of the second flat portion 461b, the transmission shaft rod 461 is moved. Therefore, it cannot move beyond the end of the second flat portion 461b. Accordingly, the axial length of the second flat portion 461b is set based on the length that allows the second cam 464 to move.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, one purpose of allowing the second cam 464 to move in the axial direction is to release the engagement between the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 and drive It is to cancel the transmission of power. Therefore, the length of the second flat portion 461b in the axial direction is set with the length that can disengage the first cam 451 as the second cam 464 moves in the axial direction as a lower limit.

  The second cam 464 is a cylindrical member having a center hole formed in a D-shaped cross section, and includes a protrusion 464 a that protrudes from the lower surface facing the first cam 451 toward the side close to the first cam 451. The protruding portion 464a has a mountain shape that slopes downward from the center position toward both sides of the second cam 464 in the circumferential direction.

  The first cam 451 is a cylindrical member whose central axis portion is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 451, and a recessed portion 451 a that is recessed from the upper surface facing the second cam 464 toward the side away from the second cam 464. , And a band-shaped protrusion 451b that protrudes outward in the radial direction and extends in a band shape along the circumferential direction.

  The recessed portion 451a has a shape that meshes with the protruding portion 464a of the second cam 464, that is, has a valley shape that rises and slopes from the center position toward both sides in the circumferential direction.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the band-shaped protrusion 451b includes a first part 451b1 extending along a plane perpendicular to the axis along the lower end of the first cam 451, and a bottom view clock of the first part 451b1. And a second portion 451b2 that inclines in a manner of approaching the second cam 464 from the end in the clockwise direction toward the clockwise direction.

  In addition, since the recessed part 451a of the 1st cam 451 and the protrusion part 464a of the 2nd cam 464 are one each, after the engagement with the 1st cam 451 and the 2nd cam 464 is cancelled | released, engagement resumes When doing so, the engagement is always restarted with the same angular relationship (phase relationship).

  In other words, the post-rotation posture (or phase) of the drive motor 450 that rotationally drives the first cam 451 is the posture (or phase) of the second cam 464 while the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 are engaged. ). Therefore, as compared with the case where a posture (or phase) shift occurs before and after the engagement is released, a sensor for detecting the posture (or phase) shift can be eliminated, and the number of members can be reduced.

  67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 460 along the line LXIV-LXIV in FIG. 63 (b). 67A shows the same state as FIG. 64, and FIG. 67B shows a state where the first cam 451 is rotated in a state where the rotation of the transmission device 460 is restricted.

  Here, when a player applies a load to grip the operation unit 440 and push it toward the first arm 420 side, the tip adjustment member 462 of the transmission device 460 is locked to the adjustment recess 432 of the second arm 430. The rotation of the transmission device 460 is restricted. Therefore, if the first cam 450 and the second cam 464 remain engaged, a load is applied to the drive motor 450 when the drive motor 450 is driven, and the drive motor 450 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second cam 464 is configured so that the engagement between the second cam 464 and the first cam 451 is released when the first cam 451 continues to rotate while the second cam 464 is not rotatable. Is done. More specifically, when the first cam 451 continues to rotate while the second cam 464 cannot rotate, the contact position between the recessed portion 451a of the first cam 451 and the protruding portion 464a of the second cam 464 is in the circumferential direction. Accordingly, the second cam 464 moves away from the first cam 451 in the axial direction along the inclination of the recessed portion 451a and the protruding portion 464a.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the protruding portion 464a is disposed on the second cam side 464 side of the surface of the first cam 451 facing the second cam 464 (from the recessed portion 451a to the protruding portion 454a). Is pushed out), the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 do not interfere with each other when viewed in the circumferential direction, so that transmission of the driving force of the driving motor 450 can be released. The release of the transmission of the driving force does not relate to the state of the second tilting device 400 (such as a shortened state or an extended state) and can be performed at an arbitrary timing.

  Therefore, even if the player handles the operation unit 440 roughly roughly and a load is generated in which the operation unit 440 is pushed toward the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310 while the drive motor 450 is being driven, It can be prevented from being damaged. Thereby, the freedom degree of the operation method of the operation part 440 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 67B, the second cam 464 is pressed against the first cam 451 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2. Therefore, when the first cam 451 rotates by one revolution and returns to the posture of FIG. 67 (a) again, the protruding portion 464a is engaged with the recessed portion 451a, and transmission of the driving force can be resumed.

  Returning to FIG. 64 and FIG. The tip adjusting member 462 is a columnar member having a circular shape in a bottom view that is fixed to the transmission shaft rod 461 so as not to rotate when the first flat portion 461a of the transmission shaft rod 461 is inserted from the lower surface. In a predetermined posture (see FIG. 64) during rotation of 461, an inclined surface portion 462a that comes into contact with the inclined side surface 432a and a flat surface that is connected to the tip side end of the inclined surface portion 462a and orthogonal to the axial direction is formed. And a distal end flat surface 462b.

  The change from FIG. 64 to FIG. 65 is caused by rotating the rotation shaft of the drive motor 450 by 180 degrees. More specifically, the arrangement (phase) of the distal end flat surface 462b is changed by the rotation, and the contact position with the inclined side surface 432a is changed, whereby the position of the operation unit 440 is changed. Therefore, the moving speed of the operation unit 440 can be changed by adjusting the rotation speed of the drive motor 450.

  The vibration transmitting member 470 is disposed to face the inner support wall 422b and extends from the guided arm portion 471 extending along the extending direction of the first arm portion 420 and the lower end portion of the guided arm portion 471. An intermediate extension part 472 extending toward the center of the tilting device 12310 along the axis O1, and a weight member M1a of the drive motor M1 along a straight line extending from the extension tip of the intermediate extension part 472 to the rotation axis O1. The end portion is fixed to the tip of the guided arm portion 471 and the impacted portion 473 formed so as to be able to come into contact with the weight member M1a when being arranged close to the rotation axis O1. The biasing spring SP3 is mainly provided.

  In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the vibration transmitting member is separated from the weight member M1a by the urging force of the urging spring SP3, and in the extended state (see FIG. 65), the guided arm portion 471 is pushed down by the belt-like protrusion 451b. It is arranged close to the weight member M1a.

  When the drive motor M1 rotates in the state of being disposed in the proximity, the weight member M1a and the vibration transmission member 470 collide with each other when the weight member M1a is disposed on the vibration transmission member 470 side, and the weight member M1a is the vibration transmission member 470. Are spaced apart from each other.

  The front end surface of the colliding part 473 disposed to face the weight member M1a is formed from a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the transmission shaft rod 461. Therefore, when the weight member M1a collides with the colliding part 473, a load along the extending direction of the transmission shaft rod 461 (the vertical direction in FIG. 64) is applied to the vibration transmission member 470.

  Therefore, as the weight member M1a rotates by driving the drive motor M1, the vibration transmitting member 470 is orthogonal to the extending direction of the first arm 420 (the vertical direction in FIG. 64), that is, the operation direction of the tilting device 12310. It can be vibrated along the direction.

  The vibration of the vibration transmitting member 470 is sequentially transmitted to the first arm portion 420, the second arm portion 430, and the operation portion 440, and vibrates the player's finger that touches the operation portion 440. At this time, the vibration of the vibration transmitting member 470 is generated along the radial direction of the circle centering on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310. Therefore, the vibration becomes smaller as the position of the operation unit 440 becomes farther from the rotation axis O1. Can be prevented.

  That is, in the case of vibrations that occur along the circumferential direction of the circle centering on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310, the load that the player feels due to the vibration increases as the distance from the rotation axis O1 increases (the arm extends). Since it becomes smaller from the viewpoint, it is difficult for the player to feel the vibration.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, vibration is generated along the radial direction of the circle centering on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310. Therefore, regardless of the distance from the rotation axis O1, the load felt by the player due to the vibration is generated. Can be equivalent. Thereby, the vibration effect can be effectively performed even in the extended state (see FIG. 65).

  Here, vibration transmission will be described by comparing a shortened state and an extended state. There are two modes of vibration transmitted to the operation unit 440. That is, the vibration in the rotation direction caused by the rotation of the tilting device 12310 due to the vibration of the drive motor M1 and the vibration in the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461 caused by the vibration transmission member 470 colliding with the weight member M1a. is there. These two types of vibrations have low transmission efficiency in the shortened state and high transmission efficiency in the extended state. Details will be described below.

  First, the vibration in the axial direction of the transmission shaft bar 461 in the shortened state will be described. In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the urging force of the urging spring SP1 is applied to the second arm portion 430 in a direction in which the second arm portion 430 is brought closer to the first arm portion 420. At this time, since the urging spring SP1 is expanded as compared with the extended state (see FIG. 65), the urging force is smaller than that in the extended state. Accordingly, the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 are likely to be displaced, and the first arm portion 420 vibrates along the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461 (particularly, away from the second arm portion 430). Vibration transmission efficiency from the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 430 is reduced.

  Next, vibration in the rotational direction of the tilting device 12310 in the shortened state will be described. In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), a gap is formed between the distal end support portion 424 of the first arm portion 420 and the first facing surface 431a of the second arm portion 430 disposed to face the second arm portion 430. A gap is formed between the root support portion 434 of the 430 and the first facing surface 421a of the first arm portion 420 arranged to face the 430. The lengths of these gap widths are such that the second arm 430 can be displaced with respect to the first arm 420, and the first arm 420 is relatively displaced with respect to the second arm 430. As a result, the vibration in the rotational direction of the tilting device 12310 generated when the drive motor M1 rotates is absorbed. Thereby, the vibration transmission efficiency from the 1st arm part 420 to the 2nd arm part 430 is reduced.

  Next, the vibration in the axial direction of the transmission shaft bar 461 in the extended state will be described. In the extended state (see FIG. 65), it is the same as in the shortened state that the urging force of the urging spring SP1 is applied to the second arm portion 430 in the direction in which the second arm portion 430 approaches the first arm portion 420. However, when the tip adjustment member 462 rotates, the second arm portion 430 moves away from the first arm portion 420. At this time, since the urging spring SP1 is shortened compared to the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the urging force is larger than that in the shortened state. Accordingly, it is difficult for the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 to be misaligned, and the first arm portion 420 oscillates along the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461 to the second position. Vibration transmission efficiency to the arm portion 430 is ensured (increased).

  Thus, the biasing spring SP1 is used for both the operation of returning the operation unit 440 to the shortened state (see FIG. 64) and the adjustment of the vibration transmission efficiency. Thereby, the number of parts can be reduced.

  Next, vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 in the extended state will be described. In the extended state (see FIG. 65), the gap between the distal end support portion 424 of the first arm portion 420 and the second opposing surface 431b of the second arm portion 430 arranged to face is made extremely small, and the second arm The gap between the root support part 434 of the part 430 and the second facing surface 421b of the first arm part 420 arranged to face the part 430 is made extremely small. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a gap that can absorb vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 that is generated when the drive motor M1 rotates, and to ensure vibration transmission efficiency from the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 430. Can (can be increased).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the two vibration modes, the vibration transmission efficiency can be increased in the extended state while the vibration transmission efficiency can be reduced in the shortened state. Thereby, the problem that the vibration given to the player is reduced when the operation unit 440 is away from the rotation axis O1 and is easily operated can be solved.

  In other words, it is desirable to secure a distance between the vibration device and the operation position from the viewpoint of preventing the vibration device from malfunctioning. If the distance is ensured, even if the player operates in a manner that the player strikes violently, the shock at the time of operation is attenuated before being transmitted to the vibration device, so that the failure of the vibration device can be prevented. . On the other hand, the vibration transmitted to the operation position tends to become smaller as the vibration device and the operation position are separated from each other. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can maintain a feeling of vibration (the degree and magnitude of vibration given to the player) while preventing the vibration device from malfunctioning.

  In particular, when the operation position moves relative to the vibration device as in the present embodiment, the vibration feeling during the operation changes before and after the movement, and in particular, the operation position moves to a position where the player can easily operate. Accordingly, a decrease in the feeling of vibration at the time of operation should be avoided from the viewpoint of enhancing the interest given to the player.

  It is clear that the higher the expectation level is, the more desirable it is to move the operation position so that the player can operate it more easily. This is because it is desirable that

  In the present embodiment, the extended state is more easily operated by the player (the reaction force applied to the player is smaller) in the extended state than in the shortened state. While the distance between the drive motor M1 and the operation unit 440 is longer in the extended state than in the shortened state (transmission of vibration becomes difficult), the transmission efficiency of vibration is higher than that in the shortened state. The extended state increases (vibration transmission becomes easier). Therefore, by adjusting the transmission efficiency of vibration, the difference between the vibration feeling in the shortened state and the vibration feeling in the extended state can be reduced, and the vibration feeling can be leveled.

  In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the distance from the upper cover 12311 of the tilting device 12310 to the drive motor M1 is substantially the same as the distance from the operation unit 440 to the drive motor M1. On the other hand, the upper cover 12311 is fixed without being displaced with respect to the drive motor M1, but the operation unit 440 is positioned with respect to the drive motor M1 when the first arm 420 and the second arm 430 are displaced with respect to each other. It is possible to shift. In particular, in the shortened state, a gap is generated between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430.

  Therefore, in the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the vibration given to the player is reduced when the operation is performed by touching the operation unit 440, compared with the case where the operation is performed by touching the tilting device 12310. Can do.

  Therefore, for example, when the vibration given to the player who touches the operation unit 440 can be made smaller than a recognizable size, the operation unit 440 is intentionally performed during the production in which it is not desired to notice that the drive motor M1 is being driven. You may perform the alert | report which encourages operation. Accordingly, by causing the player to operate the operation unit 440, the tilting device 12310 can be rotated, and the vibration of the tilting device 12310 by the drive motor M1 can be confused with the rotating operation. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the vibration as compared with the case where the player is stopped.

  According to this, by operating the operation unit 440, the tilting device 12310 is simultaneously rotated. If the player does not want to notice the presence or absence of the operation of the drive motor M1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the vibration by making a notification that prompts the operation unit 440 to operate. Even when the player's operation timing is arbitrarily set, the possibility that the player who performed the operation notices the operation (operation vibration, etc.) of the drive motor M1 can be reduced. Thereby, the operation | movement freedom degree of the drive motor M1 can be improved.

  68 (a) and 68 (b) are side views of the operation device 12300. FIG. 68A shows the shortened state, and FIG. 68B shows the extended state.

  This change in state is caused by the rotation of the drive motor 450, and the drive motor 450 is disposed on the side of the first arm 420 close to the rotation axis O1. Thereby, the mode years of the drive motor 450 can be lengthened.

  That is, since the tilting device 12310 is a device that rotates around the rotation axis O1, even if it moves in the same way, the vicinity of the rotation axis O1 is compared with the position away from the rotation axis O1. The operation speed is reduced. Therefore, the impact caused by the player's operation is smaller near the rotation axis O1 than at a position away from the rotation axis O1. Therefore, by disposing the drive motor 450 on the side close to the rotation axis O1 of the first arm portion 420, the mode years of the drive motor 450 can be lengthened.

  Further, by arranging the drive motor 450 in the vicinity of the rotation axis O1, the moment generated at the center of the rotation axis O1 in the tilting device 12310 by the weight of the drive motor 450 can be reduced. Thereby, since the tilting device 12310 can be maintained at the raised position with a small reaction force, the degree of freedom in setting the biasing force of the torsion spring 343 can be improved. That is, since the degree of freedom of setting the reaction force returned to the player can be improved, for example, by setting the reaction force, it is possible to further improve the feeling of repeated hitting.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the extended state, the interval between the operation unit 440 and the rotation axis O1 is longer than the interval between the curved wall portion 316 of the tilting device 12310 and the rotation axis O1 compared to the shortened state. Become. Therefore, the operable range, which is the range in which the player can operate the operation device 12300, is larger than the range from the rotation axis O1 to the curved wall portion 316 in the shortened state. Accordingly, in the extended state, the range in which the player can perform the operation is widened, so that a feeling of fatigue during the operation can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the extended state, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit 440 arranged at the outermost part of the operable range is minimized. That is, compared with the case where the tilting device 12310 is operated, the reaction force applied to the player can be reduced by operating the operation unit 440. Thus, in the extended state, operating the operation unit 440 can reduce the stress (such as fatigue) felt by the player rather than operating the tilting device 12310, so the player is encouraged to operate the operation unit 440. Can be made easy.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a gap is formed between the fastening and fixing portion 410 and the branch portion 425. Therefore, even when the operation unit 440 is rapidly operated by the pedal, the tilting device 12310 to which the fastening fixing unit 410 is fixed and the operation unit 440 are arranged until the load is applied by the gap. Since the position can be shifted in comparison, the load applied to the connection position between the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 from being damaged in the vicinity of the connection position by the player's operation.

  In the present embodiment, in the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the tip adjustment member 462 and the adjustment recess 432 of the second arm 430 are also engaged in a direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction (vertical direction in FIG. 64) of the second arm 430. On the other hand, in the extended state (see FIG. 65), the distal end flat surface 462b of the distal end adjustment member 462 stays in contact with the lower surface of the second arm portion 430, and the second arm portion 430 is engaged. The engagement in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction is released (the fitting is loosened).

  Thereby, compared with a shortened state, the extended state can make it easier to tilt the second arm portion 430 in the direction perpendicular to the expansion and contraction direction of the second arm portion 430 with respect to the first arm portion 420. . For example, the second arm 430 can be easily tilted with respect to the first arm 420 around the root support portion 434 of the second arm 430 (the second arm with respect to the first arm 420). 430 can be easily bent). Therefore, when the player operates the operation unit 440, the second arm unit 430 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in the shortened state, the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 interferes with the operating direction of the tilting device 12310 (for example, the normal direction of a part of the pressing plate portion 312). Therefore, when the player operates the tilting device 12310 in the shortened state, the operation unit 440 can be an obstacle, and the player can feel difficulty in pushing.

  On the other hand, in the extended state, the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 does not interfere with the operation direction of the tilting device 12310 (the normal direction of a part of the pressing plate portion 312), so that the game is not disturbed by the operation unit 440. A person can operate the tilting device 12310 with a pedal.

  Further, the normal direction of the outer surface of the pressing plate portion 312 facing the player when the pedal operation of the tilting device 12310 is started in the extended state is the operation start direction of the second tilting device 400 (the rotation axis O1). (The tangential direction of a circle circumscribing the operation unit 440 with respect to the center), the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction becomes smaller (the direction to look upward), compared with the case where the tilting device 400 is operated, The stress felt by the player during the pushing operation can be reduced (the pushing operation is facilitated).

  In the present embodiment, the interval between the axis center of the operation unit 440 and the rotation axis O1 in the extended state is approximately 1.25 times the interval between the axis center of the operation unit 440 and the rotation axis O1 in the shortened state.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the operation unit 440 moves in the radial direction of the circle around the rotation axis O1 (direction orthogonal to the operation direction of the tilting device 12310). Therefore, the amount of change in the load applied to the player who operates the operation unit 440 with respect to the movement distance of the operation unit 440 can be maximized.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, for example, the operation speed of the drive motor 450 during the operation instruction period, which is a period for instructing the pushing operation of the tilting device 12310 on the 3rd symbol display device 81 or the like, and the player's pushing A difference from the operation speed can be given to the player as a difference in reaction force.

  That is, for example, when the drive motor 450 is gradually operated from the extended state to the shortened state during the operation instruction period, the state changes to the shortened state as compared with the case where the pushing operation is completed before the change to the shortened state is completed. The load (reaction force) applied to the player is smaller when the pushing operation is completed after the threshold is reached.

  Therefore, for example, whether or not the player can complete the push-in operation before changing to the shortened state by starting the operation of the drive motor 450 after the player's operation is detected by the sensors S1 to S3. It can be associated with the operation speed. Therefore, the reaction force applied to the player can be changed according to the change in the player's operation speed.

  In the present embodiment, when the second tilting device 400 vibrates due to the driving force of the driving motor M1 transmitted through the vibration transmitting member 470, the first arm portion 420 that houses the vibration transmitting member 470, the driving motor 450, and the transmission The device 460 vibrates together. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as an increase in transmission resistance due to the shaft misalignment between the drive motor 450 and the transmission device 460 due to vibration.

  In this embodiment, the distance from the operation unit 440 to the game board 13 along the straight line connecting the operation unit 440 and the rotation axis O1 becomes shorter as the operation unit 440 extends and becomes easier to perform the tilting operation. (The swing-up width of the player's finger when the operation unit 440 is pushed into the rotation axis O1 side is shortened).

  Therefore, when the player accidentally moves the operation unit 440 toward the rotation axis O1, the acceleration that can be applied by the player can be reduced in the extended state in which the acceleration is increased and the speed is most likely to be increased (finger and finger). The swing width can be shortened), and the speed of the final operation unit 440 can be reduced. Thereby, the impact at the time of the operation part 440 moving toward the rotating shaft O1 and arriving at the terminal can be suppressed. That is, by reducing the acceleration generated by the player's operation (acceleration expected from the swinging width of the finger) in advance, the impact when the operation unit 440 reaches the end position (becomes shortened) is suppressed. Can do.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the surfaces of the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 facing the player are different from each other. However, the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment includes the second tilting device 13400 and the tilting device 13310. The surfaces facing the player are substantially the same surface. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  69A and 69B are cross-sectional views taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A of the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 69A shows the shortened state of the second tilting device 13400, and FIG. 69B shows the extended state of the second tilting device 13400. In the present embodiment, the upper end position of the tilting device 13310 is recessed downward, and the operation unit 440 can be disposed in the recessed portion.

  The second tilting device 13400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 12400 of the twelfth embodiment, and only the fixing angle of the fastening fixing portion 410 with the tilting device 13310 is different. That is, as shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, the operation unit 440 expands and contracts in the direction SD1 along the facing surface of the tilting device 13310 with the player.

  Thereby, in the shortened state, the same operational feeling as that of the tilting device 310 described in the first embodiment can be exhibited, and in the extended state, the change of the surface (operating surface) facing the player is suppressed. When the operation unit 440 is operated by extending the maximum distance from the rotation axis O1 of the part that can be operated by the player while preventing the feeling of operation from changing significantly, it is given to the player via the tilting device 13310. The maximum value of the load (reaction force) can be reduced.

  In the extended state, the relationship between the moments about the rotation axis O1 changes compared to the shortened state, and the time until the tilting device 13310 and the second tilting device 13400 return to the posture before being pushed becomes longer. . Therefore, after the tilting device 13310 is pushed down to the lowered position, the second tilting device 13400 is changed to the extended state, thereby producing an effect of reducing the return speed of the tilting device 13310 and the second tilting device 13400. .

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the surfaces of the second tilting device 13400 and the tilting device 13310 facing the player are substantially the same plane, but the operation device 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment is the second tilting device 14400. The inclination angle of the surface facing the player (the surface formed when the operation unit 14400 changes between the shortened state and the extended state) is greater than the inclination angle of the surface facing the player of the tilting device 14310 Also set shallow. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 70A and 70B are cross-sectional views taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A of the operation device 14300 according to the fourteenth embodiment. 70A shows the shortened state of the second tilting device 14400, and FIG. 70B shows the extended state of the second tilting device 14400. In the present embodiment, the upper end position of the tilting device 14310 is recessed downward, and the operation unit 14440 can be disposed in the recessed portion.

  The second tilting device 14400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 13400 of the thirteenth embodiment, and only the mode of the operation unit 14440 is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 70A and FIG. The second tilting device 14400 is sliced at equal intervals on a plane parallel to the expansion / contraction direction, and is configured in such a manner that a cylindrical shape is maintained by being wound with a rubber-like protective film (not shown).

  The operation unit 14440 is disposed in the vicinity of the surface facing the most player among the members sliced at equal intervals, and the proximity unit 14441 engaged and fixed to the tilting device 14310, and the opposite of the proximity unit 14441. Disposed between the distal end fixing portion 14442 that is disposed and fixed to the second arm portion 430, and the proximity portion 14441 and the distal end fixing portion 14442, and is connected to each other so as to be movable relative to adjacent members. An intermediate interlocking part 14443 is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the shortened state, the proximity portion 14441 and the tip fixing portion 14442 coincide with each other in the direction intersecting the upper surface of the tilting device 14310, the amount of extension of the protective film is minimized, and the intermediate interlocking portion The operation unit 14440 including 14443 has a cylindrical shape. In this state, there is no change from the shortened state of the thirteenth embodiment.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the extended state, the proximity portion 14441 and the tip fixing portion 14442 are displaced in the direction intersecting the upper surface of the tilting device 14310, and the extension amount of the protective film is maximized. The intermediate interlocking portion 14443 moves due to the tension of the protective film. As a result, the operation unit 14440 including the intermediate interlocking unit 14443 extends along the direction SD2 in which the tilt angle with respect to the horizontal direction is smaller than the tilt angle with respect to the horizontal direction of the upper surface of the tilting device 14310. It becomes a shape.

  As a result, in the shortened state, the same operational feeling as that of the tilting device 310 described in the first embodiment can be exhibited, and in the extended state, the change in the height of the upper end position of the tilting device 14310 can be suppressed. Even when the second tilting device 14400 is driven at the timing when the player is about to start the operation, the player feels a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with the case where the height of the operation position suddenly changes. By extending the maximum distance from the rotation axis O1 of the portion that can be operated, the maximum value of the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 14310 when operating the operation unit 14440 can be reduced. it can.

  In the extended state, the relationship between the moments about the rotation axis O1 changes as compared to the shortened state, and the time until the tilting device 14310 and the second tilting device 14400 return to the posture before being pushed becomes longer. . Therefore, after the tilting device 14310 is pushed down to the lowered position, the second tilting device 14400 is changed to the extended state, thereby producing an effect of reducing the return speed of the tilting device 14310 and the second tilting device 14400. .

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 are always interlocked when the second tilting device 400 is operated by the pedal has been described. However, the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the second tilting function. The device 15400 is supported by the lower case 15360 and the upper case 15370 in such a manner that the device 15400 can rotate relative to the tilting device 310. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 71A and FIG. 71B are side views of the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment. 71A shows the shortened state of the second tilting device 15400, and FIG. 71B shows the extended state of the second tilting device 15400, and the tilting device 310 has been pushed in. The state is illustrated.

  The second tilting device 15400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 12400 of the twelfth embodiment, but the lower case 15360 and the upper case 15370 at the lower end position of the first arm portion 15420 instead of the fastening fixing portion 410. And a supported shaft portion 15410 that is rotatably supported. The supported shaft portion 15410 is rotatably supported coaxially with the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 310.

  The first arm portion 15420 is substantially the same as the first arm portion 420 in the twelfth embodiment except that the branch portion 425 is not formed and the vibration transmission member 470 does not protrude and the detection piece 15426 extends from the lower surface. The configuration is provided. That is, a drive motor 450 and a transmission device 460 are provided inside, and are connected to the second arm portion 430 so as to be extendable and contractible.

  With such a configuration, the second tilting device 15400 can operate independently of the tilting device 310. A configuration for independently detecting the operation of the second tilting device 15400 will be described. The upper case 15370 is supported by the upper case 15370 so as to be sandwiched between the upper case 15370 near the root of the second tilting member 15400, and the second tilting device 15400 is returned to the initial posture (see FIG. 71A). A torsion spring 15371 that generates a biasing force of the sensor, a detection sensor 15372 that is arranged so as to recognize the tilt of the first arm portion 15420 by detecting the position of the detection segment 15426, and the lower surface of the first arm portion 15420. And an abutting upper surface 15373 that can be arranged.

  When the tilting device 310 is pushed in, no load is applied to the second tilting device 15400, and the second tilting device 15400 works in such a manner that the urging force of the torsion spring 15371 is maintained in the initial posture. Device 15400 is maintained in an initial position. That is, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the return speed of the tilting device 310 is not affected by the moment generated from the second tilting device 15400, so that the tilting device 310 returns without depending on the state of the second tilting device 15400. Speed can be set.

  Therefore, since the return mode of the tilting device 310 does not change depending on the state of the second tilting device 15400, an appropriate load can be given to the player regardless of the state of the second tilting device 15400. For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310 repeatedly, it is possible to give an appropriate feeling of repeated hitting.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the extended state of the second tilting device 15400, the operation unit 440 is disposed outside the arc R12. Therefore, when the player holds the operation unit 440 and pushes the second tilting device 15400, the pushing operation can be completed without touching the tilting device 310. In other words, either the second tilting device 15400 or the tilting device 310 can be operated by being pushed alone.

  At this time, in the tilted posture (see FIG. 72B) in which the tilting of the second tilting device 15400 is completed, the detection piece 15426 is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor 15372, and a signal is output from the detection sensor 15372. Thus, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can recognize that the second tilting device 15400 has been pushed. That is, the detection sensor 15373 functions as a sensor that detects the operation of the second tilting device 15400.

  72A and 72B are side views of the operation device 15300. FIG. 72A and 72B show a shortened state of the second tilting device 15400. FIG. 72A shows a state in which the second tilting device 15400 tilts from FIG. 71A and the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 15400 starts to contact the upper cover 311 of the tilting device 310. 72 (b), the second tilting device 15400 further tilts from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), and the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the operation unit 440 coming into contact with the tilting device 310, whereby the second tilting device. A state where 15400 is in a tilted posture is illustrated.

  When the tilting device 310 is pushed by the operation unit 440 and the tilting device 310 tilts when tilting until the second tilting device 15400 is in the tilting posture, the tilting device 310 is as shown in FIG. It does not reach the lowered position (stays between the raised position and the lowered position). The tiltable angle of the second tilting device 15400 is set to the same angle (about 21 degrees) as that of the tilting device 310.

  According to the present embodiment, even when the second tilting device 15400 is in the shortened state, the tilting device 310 alone can perform a pushing operation to the pushing completion position. On the other hand, when the second tilting device 15400 is in the shortened state, when the operation unit 440 is gripped and pushed alone, the state from the state shown in FIG. 71A to the state shown in FIG. The second tilting device 15400 can be pushed in alone, and thereafter (see FIG. 72 (b)), the tilting device 310 is pushed in as the second tilting device 15400 is pushed. That is, it is impossible to perform the pushing operation to the pushing completion position (tilting posture) by the second tilting device 15400 alone.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is operated by pushing with a finger, the change in the reaction force applied to the player is easier to understand when the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 15400 is held and pushed. be able to. That is, the number of objects pushed in by the operation increases from only the second tilting device 15400 (see FIG. 72 (a)) to the second tilting device 15400 and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 72 (b)). The change of reaction force can be grasped visually.

  Whether the operation unit 440 is gripped and operated in the shortened state or whether the tilting device 310 is operated by pushing with a finger is determined by determining the input to the MPU 201 from each of the sensors S1 to S3, 15372. can do.

  For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the second tilting device 15400 is maintained in the initial posture, so that there is no input from the detection sensor 15372 to the MPU 201, but with the posture change of the tilting device 310, Inputs from the detection sensors S1 to S3 to the MPU 201 occur.

  On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the second tilting device 15400, an input from the detection sensor 15372 to the MPU 201 occurs as the second tilting device 15400 is pushed.

  As described above, the second tilting device 15400 and the tilting device 310 can determine which one of them is operated while being an operation member that moves simultaneously and in the same direction in a part of the range. Thereby, for example, it can be determined whether or not the player is operating the operation target as informed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this embodiment, since the vibration transmission member 470 (see FIG. 64) is not provided, the vibration of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the second tilting device 15400 only through the tilting device 310. That is, when the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in, the transmission of the vibration of the drive motor M1 is cut off in the state from FIG. 71 (a) to FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (a) to FIG. 72 (b). In the state up to this point, the vibration of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the player via the contact position of the tilting device 310 and the operation unit 440.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the moving end member 10362d is pushed into the tilting device 310 and descends has been described. However, the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment relates the moving end member 10362d to the posture change of the tilting device 310. First, a lowering device 16362g for automatically lowering is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 73A and FIG. 73B are partial cross-sectional views taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A of the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment. 73A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal and the action claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end of the piston member 362a. FIG. 73B shows the state shown in FIG. The state in which the moving end member 10362d is lowered by the length of 1/3 of the movable length by the lowering device 16362g is shown in the figure. 73A shows a state in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 73A, first position), and in FIG. 73B, the stepped member 10362f is on the rear side. A state of being arranged at the second position on the right side of FIG. 73 (b) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 73A, the operation device 16300 includes the tilting device 310 described above and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the lower side and tilts. The tilting member between the lower case 16360 that forms the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 16360 that has a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side and is disposed facing the lower case 16360. 310 is fastened and fixed to the lower case 16360 in a manner in which it is disposed, and the rising position of the tilting device 310 is determined by contacting the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 contacts the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). An upper case 370 (see FIG. 9) is mainly provided.

  The lower case 16360 will be described. The lower case 16360 is a bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper part opened, and is assembled to the bottom receiving member 361 from below and supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction (FIG. 73 (a) vertical direction). An urging device 16362 having a piston member 362a and a power application device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and supplied with electric power are arranged.

  The biasing device 16362 is a device that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 310 through the action claw portion 332, and is supported on the inner side of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c so as to be operable in the vertical direction and opened downward. A piston member 362a having a shape, a coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal The bottom cover member 362c fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 in a manner to perform the above, and the moving end supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be able to contact the coil spring 362b from the lower end side so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The member 10362d and the movable end member 10362d and the bottom cover member 362c are disposed between the member 10362d and the movable end member 10362d. A first position close to the moving end member 10362d and a position far from the moving end member 10362d from the return spring 16362e to be urged and a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d (front-rear direction, FIG. 51 (a) left-right direction). A stepped member 10362f that is movable between the second position and a drive that is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 and that drives the stepped member 10362f along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. It mainly includes a solenoid SOL10 and a lowering device 16362g configured to be able to change the vertical position of the moving end member 10362d by applying a downward load in a manner of riding on the moving end member 10362d.

  In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b has a natural length as shown in FIG. That is, the state in which the piston member 362a is disposed at the upper end position is the natural length of the coil spring 362b.

  The return spring 16362e is formed of a spring member having the same elastic coefficient as that of the coil spring 362b. That is, the return spring 16362e and the coil spring 362b have the same displacement required to generate the same reaction force. Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 73B), the displacement amount when the piston member 362a is pushed in by the tilting device 310 and the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e expand and contract. Is one to one (the amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b: the amount of displacement of the return spring 16362e = 1: 1).

  The lowering device 16362g is a moving member 16362g1 disposed at a position overlapping the moving end member 10362d in the vertical direction, and a screw rod 16362g2 which is a rod member inserted through the moving member 16362g1 and whose outer shape is formed in a male screw shape. A drive motor 16362g3 that rotates the screw rod 16362g2 and is fixed to the bottom cover member 362c or the pachinko machine 10, and a moving member that extends from the side wall of the drive motor 16362g3 in parallel with the extending direction of the screw rod 16362g2. The anti-rotation plate 16362g4 that mainly contacts the side surface of the 16362g1 and prevents the rotation of the moving member 16362g1 is mainly provided.

  According to the present embodiment, the moving end member 10362d can be lowered by an arbitrary amount in advance by the lowering device 16362g, and then the position of the moving end member 10362d is changed by arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position. Can be made. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be changed corresponding to the arrangement of the tilting device 310.

  The moving member 16362g1 includes a through hole penetrating along the vertical direction, and a female screw shape is formed in the through hole. The female screw shape and the male screw shape of the screw rod 16362g are formed so as to be able to be screwed together with a slight gap. When the drive motor 16362g3 is driven and the screw rod 16362g2 is rotated, the moving member 16362g1 is moved up and down by a so-called ball screw mechanism.

  In the state shown in FIG. 73A, the moving member 16362g1 of the lowering device 16362g is disposed at the upper end position of the moving range, and the stepped member 16362f is disposed at the first position. Even if the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal in this state, the moving end member 10362d is supported by the stepped member 10362f, so that the moving end member 10362d is prevented from descending from the upper end position. Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the player in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310 is the same as in the first embodiment.

  In the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), the stepped member 16362f is disposed at the second position, the moving end member 10362d can be moved up and down, and the moving member 16362g1 of the lowering device 16362g is moved downward to move the moving end member 10362d. Is disposed at a position between the upper end position and the lower end position. Thus, in this embodiment, before the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal, the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d can be changed in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the moving end member 10362d is lowered in advance, the piston member 362a is similarly lowered. Therefore, the contact timing between the action claw portion 332 of the tilting device 310 and the piston member 362a. Can be delayed. That is, the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 from the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the angle corresponding to the posture change) at the timing when the reaction force generated by the biasing device 16362 is added to the reaction force applied to the player operating the tilting device 310. ) Becomes larger.

  Thereby, a different operational feeling can be given to the player. That is, a player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually learns how much reaction force is generated when the tilting device 310 is pushed in each operation, for example, changes the timing at which reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of incongruity that the situation is different from usual.

  Accordingly, by associating the difference in timing at which reaction force begins to occur with the difference in jackpot expectation level, by controlling the lowering device 16362g (for example, when the jackpot expectation level is large, the moving member 16362g1 is lowered more greatly), Since the sense of incongruity given to the player can be associated with the difference in jackpot expectation, the push operation of the tilting device 310 can be promoted for the purpose of confirming whether or not the sense of discomfort occurs. .

  A case will be described in which the tilting device 310 is operated to the lowered position in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). Since the return spring 16362e has already been displaced, the corresponding biasing force is applied upward to the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, even if the action claw portion 332 pushes down the piston member 362a, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the downward biasing force generated from the coil spring 362b is less than the biasing force of the return spring 16362e.

  On the other hand, after the downward urging force generated from the coil spring 362b reaches the urging force of the return spring 16362e, that is, after the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b reaches the displacement amount of the return spring 16362e, the mutual urging force is changed. In a manner of matching, the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e are both contracted, whereby the moving end member 10362d is lowered and separated from the moving member 16362g1.

  In this case, the final arrangement of the piston member 362a and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e can be made equal. The stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d is This is the same as the case where the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal in the state of being arranged at the upper end position (from the state shown in FIG. 73A to the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position).

  Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is operated with the stepped member 10362f disposed at the second position and the moving end member 10362d disposed at the upper end position, the tilting device 310 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). When the pedal is operated, the load (reaction force) applied to the player immediately after the tilting device 310 is operated to the lowered position does not change.

  Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player immediately after the end of the pedal operation can be made equal while changing the generation timing of the load (reaction force) applied to the player who operates the tilting device 310.

  Thereby, a different operational feeling can be given to the player. That is, a player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually learns how much reaction force is generated when the tilting device 310 is pushed in each operation, for example, changes the timing at which reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of incongruity that the situation is different from usual. Similarly, by changing the reaction force returned immediately after the pedal operation is finished, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual.

  Accordingly, the descent device 16362g is driven and controlled by associating the combination of the difference in timing at which reaction force begins to occur and the difference in reaction force returned immediately after the pedal operation is completed with the difference in jackpot expectation (for example, the jackpot expectation is When it is large, the reaction force generation timing is delayed and the reaction force immediately after the pedal operation is finished), thereby making it possible to associate the discomfort given to the player with the difference in the jackpot expectation. For the purpose of confirming whether or not this occurs, the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 can be promoted.

  When the player pedals the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 73 (b), the generation timing of the reaction force from the biasing device 16362 is such that the piston member 362a is disposed at the upper end position (see FIG. 73 (a)). Since the stepped member 10362f is slower than the case where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position, the player is given a sense of incongruity that the expectation degree of jackpot is large (Ichiki). On the other hand, immediately after the pedal operation is finished, The reaction force applied is equivalent to the case where the piston member 362a is disposed at the upper end position (see FIG. 73 (a)) and the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position. There is no sense of incongruity. In other words, the player can be relieved by the reaction force applied from the tilting device 310 during the pushing process of the tilting device 310.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the player who pedals the tilting device 310 is notified of the jackpot expectation degree due to the difference in reaction force generation timing in one push-in process. The notification regarding the jackpot expectation degree can be performed by the difference in the reaction force immediately after the end of pushing. Therefore, the player can be notified of the jackpot expectation level due to the difference in the reaction force over a plurality of times in different time zones in one push-in process.

  Accordingly, the degree of attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 can be concentrated from the start of the operation to the completion of the operation.

  74A and 74B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 16300 along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A. 74A shows a state in which the stepped member 10362f has been changed to the first position from the state shown in FIG. 73B, and FIG. 74B shows the state shown in FIG. 73B. The state in which the moving member 16362g1 is lowered from the state by the length of 1/3 of the movable length of the moving end member 10362d is shown.

  In the state shown in FIG. 74 (a), the arrangement of the piston member 362a is the same as in FIG. 73 (b). However, unlike the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), the vertical movement of the moving end member 10362d is stepped. It is regulated by the member 10362f. Therefore, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the pedal operation is completed while the timing at which the reaction force of the biasing device 10362 is generated is the same as that when the pedal operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). Immediately after, the magnitude of the load (reaction force) given to the player can be made different from the case where the pedal operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b).

  That is, by restricting the lowering of the moving end member 10362d, the amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b becomes larger (approximately 4/3 times) than when the pedal operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). Become).

  Thereby, a different operational feeling can be given to the player. That is, a player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually learns how much reaction force is generated when the tilting device 310 is pushed in each operation, for example, changes the timing at which reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of incongruity that the situation is different from usual. Similarly, by changing the reaction force returned immediately after the pedal operation is finished, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual.

  Accordingly, the descent device 16362g is driven and controlled by associating the combination of the difference in timing at which reaction force begins to occur and the difference in reaction force returned immediately after the pedal operation is completed with the difference in jackpot expectation (for example, the jackpot expectation is When it is large, the reaction force generation timing is delayed and the reaction force immediately after the pedal operation is finished), thereby making it possible to associate the discomfort given to the player with the difference in the jackpot expectation. For the purpose of confirming whether or not this occurs, the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 can be promoted.

  When the player pedals the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 74A, the reaction force from the biasing device 16362 is generated at the upper end position of the piston member 362a (see FIG. 73A). Since the stepped member 10362f is slower than the case where the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position, the player is given a sense of incongruity that the expectation degree of jackpot is large, and the reaction force applied to the player immediately after the pedal operation is finished is a piston. Since the member 362a is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 73 (a)) and the stepped member 10362f is larger than the case where the member 362a is arranged at the second position, there is a sense of incongruity that it is expected that the jackpot expectation degree is large. Can be given. In other words, the player can confirm the magnitude of the big hit expectation level in the push-in process of the tilting device 310 according to the generation timing and magnitude of the reaction force applied from the tilting device 310.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the player who pedals the tilting device 310 is notified of the jackpot expectation degree due to the difference in reaction force generation timing in one push-in process. The notification regarding the jackpot expectation degree can be performed by the difference in the reaction force immediately after the end of pushing. Therefore, the player can be notified of the jackpot expectation level due to the difference in the reaction force over a plurality of times in different time zones in one push-in process.

  Accordingly, the degree of attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 can be concentrated from the start of the operation to the completion of the operation.

  In the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), the arrangement of the piston members 362a is lowered compared to the state shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (a). Therefore, the generation timing of the load (reaction force) generated from the urging device 16362 and applied to the player who operates the tilting device 310 is set later than the state shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (a). The

  In the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), the moving end member 10362d is disposed at a position 2/3 from the top of the moving range. Here, in order to displace the return spring 16362e by operating the tilting device 310 with the movable end member 10362d lowered, the coil spring 362b needs to be displaced by the same amount as the return spring 16362e. In the state shown in 74 (b), the maximum allowable displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is set to 1/3 of the moving range of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b cannot be made equal to the displacement amount of the return spring 16362e.

  Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pedaled from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) to the lowered position, the moving end member 10362d is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 74 (b). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 74B, the arrangement of the stepped member 10362f cannot be determined from the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310.

  Here, when it is necessary to arrange the stepped member 10362f in the first position in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d, for example, the moving end member 10362d is moved immediately after detecting the operation of the player. Even if it is desired to perform the control, it is necessary to interpose the operation of retracting the stepped member 10362f to the second position. Therefore, the moving end member 10362d and the stepped member 10362f may collide with each other, and a desired operation is generated. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 74B of the present embodiment, the position of the moving end member 10362d is maintained with respect to the operation of the tilting device 310 with the stepped member 10362f disposed at the second position. Therefore, the moving member 16362g1 can be quickly moved up and down immediately after the player pedals the tilting device 310.

  For example, when the moving member 16362g1 is rapidly raised, the moving end member 10362d is raised by the urging force of the return spring 16362e. More specifically, the moving end member 10362d moves up by a length of 1/6 of the moving range. As a result, the amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b changes to 1.5 times, so that the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 increases about 1.5 times. Therefore, the load applied to the player can be immediately increased 1.5 times by raising the moving member 16362g1 immediately after the player has operated the tilting device 310 to the lowered position. This can give a sense of incongruity by increasing the load.

  For example, the case where the moving member 16362g1 is rapidly lowered will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A of the operation device 16300. 75 shows a state in which the moving end member 10362d is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 74B to the lower end position of the movable range of the moving end member 10362d, and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362 is 0 ( The state of “natural length” is illustrated.

  When the moving member 16362g1 is suddenly lowered from the state shown in FIG. 74B toward the state shown in FIG. 75, the moving end member 10362d is also suddenly lowered, and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 75, the amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b is zero, and the load applied from the biasing device 16362 to the tilting device 310 is zero.

  Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is reduced. Immediately after the player pedals the tilting device 310 to the lowered position, the moving member 16362g1 is lowered, so that the load applied to the player can be immediately reduced and eventually reduced to zero. Can give a sense of incongruity due to a decrease in

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the arrangement of the moving member 16362g1 causes the moving end member 10362d to function as a fixed end of the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d serves as the moving end (of the coil spring 362d and the return spring 16362e). Both the case of functioning as an intermediate position and an end portion moving in the direction in which the springs are connected in series can be limited.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the shape-invariable moving end member 10362d is pushed into the tilting device 310 and descends has been described, but the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes a shape-variable moving end member 17362d. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 76A is a partial cross-sectional view taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19A of the operating device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 76B is a portion of the deformed rotating member 17362g1. 77 is a perspective view, and FIG. 77 is a development view of the outer peripheral surface of the deformed rotating member 17362g1. 76A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal and the action claw portion 332 starts to contact the end portion of the piston member 362a. In FIG. 77, a developed view for a central angle of 360 degrees is shown. Illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the operation device 17300 includes the tilting device 310 described above and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the lower side and tilts. The tilting member between the lower case 17360 that forms the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 17360 that has a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from the upper side and is disposed facing the lower case 17360. 310 is fastened and fixed to the lower case 17360 in a manner in which it is disposed, and the rising position of the tilting device 310 is determined by contacting the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). An upper case 370 (see FIG. 9) is mainly provided.

  The lower case 17360 will be described. The lower case 17360 is a bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper part opened, and is assembled to the bottom receiving member 361 from below and supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction (FIG. 76 (a) vertical direction). An urging device 17362 having a piston member 362a and a power application device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and supplied with electric power are arranged.

  The biasing device 17362 is a device that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 310 through the action claw portion 332, and is supported on the inner side of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c so as to be operable in the vertical direction and is opened downward. A piston member 362a having a shape, a coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal The bottom cover member 362c fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 in a manner to perform the above, and the moving end supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be able to contact the coil spring 362b from the lower end side so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The member 17362d is disposed between the moving end member 17362d and the bottom cover member 362c, and the moving end member 10362d faces upward. A first position close to the moving end member 17362d and a distance from the moving end member 17362d from a return spring 17362e to be biased and a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 17362d (front-rear direction, FIG. 76 (a) left-right direction). A stepped member 10362f that is movable between the second position and a drive that is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 and that drives the stepped member 10362f along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. It mainly includes a solenoid SOL10 and a member deformation device 17362g having a deformed rotating member 17362g1 that engages with the moving end member 17362d and moves up and down together with the moving end member 17362d.

  In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b has a natural length as shown in FIG. That is, the state in which the piston member 362a is disposed at the upper end position is the natural length of the coil spring 362b.

  The moving end member 17362d is arranged on the upper side of the plate-like intermediate plate member 17362d1 in which the locked portion 10362d1 is formed and the intermediate plate member 17362d1, and is slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1. An upper plate member 17362d2 and a lower plate member 17362d3 disposed below the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and capable of sliding in the vertical direction with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), since the moving end member 17362d is sandwiched between the upper and lower coil springs 362b and the return spring 17362e, the members 17362d1 to 17362d3 are separated if there is no special load from others. They move together and move up and down.

  The return spring 17362e is formed of a spring member having the same elastic coefficient as that of the coil spring 362b. That is, the return spring 17362e and the coil spring 362b have the same displacement required to generate a similar reaction force. Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 76B), the displacement amount when the piston member 362a is pushed in by the tilting device 310 and the coil spring 362b and the return spring 17362e expand and contract. Is one to one (the amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b: the amount of displacement of the return spring 17362e = 1: 1).

  The member deforming device 17362g has a deformed rotating member 17362g1 disposed at a position where it interferes with the front side end of the moving end member 17362d in the vertical direction, and a D-shaped cross section inserted through the deformed rotating member 17362g1 so as not to be relatively rotatable. The rod-shaped rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 and a drive motor 17362g3 for rotating the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the irregularly shaped rotating member 17362g1 is formed of a pair of upper and lower cylindrical bodies UT, BT.

  The upper cylindrical body UT that forms the upper side of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is a member that is sandwiched between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the upper plate member 17362d2, and has an insertion hole UT0 having a D-shaped cross section and 1 / of the center angle. A first upper surface UT1 that forms 4 (for 90 degrees), a second upper surface UT2 that is adjacent to the first upper surface UT1 in the clockwise direction of the top surface and that forms a quarter of the central angle (for 90 degrees), A third upper surface UT3 adjacent to the second upper surface UT2 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the upper surface and forming 1/4 (90 degrees) of the central angle, and an adjacent surface in the clockwise direction when viewed from the upper surface of the third upper surface UT3. And a fourth upper surface UT4 that forms a quarter of the central angle (90 degrees).

  Similarly, the lower cylindrical body BT forming the lower side of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is a member sandwiched between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the lower plate member 17362d3, and coincides with the insertion hole UT0 in the vertical direction. And a first lower surface BT1 that is disposed at a position and has a D-shaped cross section, forms a quarter of the central angle (90 degrees), and is adjacent to the first lower surface BT1 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the lower surface. The second lower surface BT2 that forms 1/4 (90 degrees) of the central angle and the second lower surface BT2 adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction of the lower surface BT2 to form 1/4 (90 degrees) of the central angle. And a fourth lower surface BT4 that is adjacent to the third lower surface BT3 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the lower surface and forms a quarter of the central angle (for 90 degrees).

  The insertion hole UT0 of the upper cylindrical body UT and the insertion hole of the lower cylindrical body BT are formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2. That is, the upper cylindrical body UT and the lower cylindrical body BT are pivotally supported by the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 in a state where the upper cylindrical body UT and the lower cylindrical body BT are not rotatable relative to the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 and are movable in the vertical direction (FIG. 76 ( a)).

  Accordingly, when the coil spring 362b is lowered after the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position, the deformed rotary member 17362g1 is also lowered along the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 as the moving end member 17362d is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in this embodiment, the intermediate plate member 17362d1 of the moving end member 17362d is sandwiched between the upper cylindrical body UT and the lower cylindrical body BT, and the upper cylindrical body UT. Further, an upper plate member 17362d2 is disposed above, and a lower plate member 17362d3 is disposed further below the lower cylindrical body BT. Then, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 rotates and the vertical dimension of the portion of each cylindrical body UT, BT facing the moving end member 17362d is changed, whereby the arrangement of the upper plate member 173621d2 relative to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 or the intermediate plate The arrangement of the lower plate member 173621d3 with respect to the member 17362d1 can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 77, a moving upper end Uh1 that is the upper end position of the moving range and a moving lower end Uh0 that is the lower end position of the moving range are set on the upper surface of the upper cylindrical body UT of the deformed rotating member 17362g1. On the lower surface of the side cylindrical body BT, a moving upper end Bh0 that is the upper end position of the moving range and a moving lower end Bh1 that is the lower end position of the moving range are set.

  The state of the upper surface of the upper tubular body UT and the lower surface of the lower tubular body BT of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 changes at an angular interval of 90 degrees (position change in the vertical direction with respect to the rotation of the drive motor 17362g3).

  For example, when the initial phase θ0, which is one angular position of the deformed rotating member 17362g1, is disposed opposite to the moving end member 17362d (see FIG. 76A), the drive motor 17362g3 is driven, and the deformed rotating member 17362g1 When rotating counterclockwise, the phase facing the moving end member 17362d shifts to the first phase θ1.

  Meanwhile, since the first upper surface UT1 of the upper cylindrical body UT is disposed opposite to the moving end member 17362d, the upper plate member 17362d2 stops at the moving lower end Uh0 with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1, while the lower cylindrical body BT Since the first lower surface BT1 is disposed opposite to the moving end member 17362d, the lower plate member 17362d3 is displaced from the moving upper end Bh0 toward the moving lower end Bh1 with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 (see FIG. 78 (a)). Thus, the shape of the moving end member 17362d can be changed by rotating the deformed rotating member 17362g1.

  78 (a), 78 (b), 79 (a), and 79 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along a line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line in FIG. 19 (a) of the operation device 17300. In FIG. 78A, the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the top in FIG. 76A, and the first phase θ1 of the deformed rotary member 17362g1 is disposed opposite to the moving end member 17362d. In FIG. 78 (b), the rotating slide shaft rod 17362g2 further rotates in the same direction, and the second phase θ2 of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is arranged opposite to the moving end member 17362d. In FIG. 79 (b), the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 further rotates in the same direction and the third phase θ3 of the deformed rotary member 17362g1 is arranged opposite to the moving end member 17362d. The intermediate position between the third phase θ3 and the initial phase θ0 of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is opposed to the moving end member 17362d. The placed state is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, according to the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b or the return spring 17362e can be contracted in advance in a state where the moving end member 17362d is disposed at the upper end position. Thereby, the load (reaction force) given to a player can be changed.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 78A, the state of the coil spring 362b is not changed from the state shown in FIG. 76A, while the return spring 17362e is contracted in advance. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is operated with the stepped member 10362f in the first position (see FIG. 78 (a)) is shown in FIG. 76 (a). Compared to the state shown (in the comparison of the state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle), there is no change. On the other hand, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position with the pedal operation completed is shown in FIG. ) Is larger than the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 78 (a), compared to the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the tilting device 310 is interposed. The load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position after completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 while equalizing the load (reaction force) applied to the player. (Reaction force) can be increased. Thereby, a player can be notified of a step change.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 78 (b), the state of the coil spring 362b is contracted in advance compared to FIG. 76 (a), while the state of the return spring 17362e does not change. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is operated with the stepped member 10362f in the first position (see FIG. 78B) is shown in FIG. 76A and FIG. Compared to the state shown in FIG. 78 (a) (in the comparison of the state where the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position with the pedal operation completed is shown in FIG. ) In comparison with the state shown in FIG. 78 (a).

  Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 78 (b), compared to the state shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 78 (a), the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position. When the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position after the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed while increasing the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 is used. The load (reaction force) applied to the player can be increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), and can be equivalent to the state shown in FIG. 78 (a). Thereby, a player can be notified of a step change.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 79A, the state of the coil spring 362b is contracted in advance compared to FIG. 76A, and the state of the return spring 17362e is contracted in advance compared to FIG. 76A. . Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is operated with the stepped member 10362f placed in the first position (see FIG. 79A) is shown in FIG. 78B. Compared to the state shown (in the comparison of the state where the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle), it is equivalent. On the other hand, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position with the pedal operation completed is shown in FIG. ) (In comparison with the states shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 78 (a)).

  Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 79A, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position is shown in FIG. While being equivalent to the state illustrated in (b), when the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position after the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed, a load (reverse force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is obtained. Force) can be increased compared to the states shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a), and 78 (b). Thereby, a player can be notified of a step change.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (b), the state of the coil spring 362b is contracted in advance compared to FIG. 76 (a), and the state of the return spring 17362e is contracted in advance compared to FIG. 76 (a). . The amount of contraction is smaller than the amount of contraction shown in FIG. For this reason, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled with the stepped member 10362f placed in the first position (see FIG. 79 (b)) is shown in FIG. 79 (a). Compared to the state shown (in the comparison of the state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle), it becomes smaller. On the other hand, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position with the pedal operation completed is shown in FIG. ) Is smaller than the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 79 (b), the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position is shown in FIG. The load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the second position after completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 while being smaller than the state shown in FIG. The reaction force can be reduced as compared with the state shown in FIG. Thereby, a player can be notified of a step change.

  79 (b) is a state in which the fourth upper surface UT4 and the fourth lower surface BT4 are arranged to face the moving end member 17362d, and the rotating slide shaft rod 17362g2 is rotated by a predetermined angle to change the shape of the deformed rotating member 17362g1. The amount of movement (separation width) of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 is changed by changing the portion disposed opposite to the moving end member 17362d between the third phase θ3 and the initial phase θ0. Can be changed continuously.

  According to the present embodiment, the deformed portion of the moving end member 17362d and the stepped member 10362f do not interfere with each other, so that the irregularly shaped rotating member 17362g1 can be rotated at an arbitrary timing. For example, after the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed, after the notification that the pushing of the tilting device 310 is continued, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is rotated to change the state of the moving end member 17362d and tilt. The load (reaction force) applied to the player via the device 310 can be changed.

  For example, from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the deformed rotary member 17362g1 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from above to reach the state shown in FIG. 79 (a) via the state shown in FIG. 79 (b). From there, the odd-shaped rotating member 17362g1 is further rotated 90 degrees in the opposite direction. Thus, by repeating the direction and rotating 90 degrees, it is possible to vary the strength of the load applied to the player who keeps pushing the tilting device 310.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the lower end surface 2332b of the action claw portion 2332 has a shape for making the load felt by the player constant. However, the shape is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the shape behind the switching point 2332c may be recessed in a direction further away from the piston member 2362a. This reduces the load applied to the tilting device 2310 from the piston member 2362a after the switching point 2332c and the piston member 2362a are released from contact (when the rotation angle of the tilting device 2310 is further increased). This can be used for effects that reduce the load on the person.

  In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the load applied to the tilting device 4310 continues to increase immediately after the tilting device 4310 rotates 3 ° from the ascending position, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, at the position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position (boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation), the area of the magnets overlapping in the radial direction of the circle around the rotation axis O1 is set to zero. You may comprise so that the load applied to the inclination apparatus 4310 may become the minimum value in the position rotated 3 degrees from the raising position. In this case, the player can easily determine the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 are not in contact with each other is described until the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 may always be in contact with each other until the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position. In this case, for example, by configuring the degree of tightness of the torsion spring 5383 that applies an urging force to the rotating roller 5381 so as to be manually changeable, it is possible to change the operating resistance when the tilting device 5310 is pushed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 of the tilting device 6310 is such that the rotational axis O1 is based on the contact point J1 between the tilting device 6310 and the rotating member 6381 in a state where the tilting device 6310 is disposed at the raised position. Although the case where it entered inward from circular arc C6 made into the center was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, in the range from the contact point J1 to 3 ° upward, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 is a shape along the arc C6, and in the range from 3 ° upward from the contact point J1, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 is formed. May be formed so as to enter the inside from the arc C6. In this case, the rotation member 6381 is prevented from being separated from the tilting device 6310 by the operating speed of the tilting device 6310 in the range from the state in which the tilting device 6310 is disposed at the raised position to the rotation of 3 ° (the range of the push operation). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resistance given to the player from changing due to the displacement speed of the tilting device 6310 in the range of the push operation.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the fixed magnet Ma2 and the moving magnet Ma7 are attracted in the pedal operation range of the tilting device 7310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the fixed magnet Ma2 and the moving magnet Ma7 may be attracted by a push operation. In this case, since the movement resistance of the tilting device 7310 changes depending on the displacement speed of the tilting device 7310 during the push operation (for example, when the tilting device 7310 is pushed in vigorously, the return is delayed), it is possible to perform an appropriate repeated hitting operation. The allowable range of the displacement speed of the tilting device 7310 that can be made is narrowed. As a result, the mode of continuous hitting when the player performs the continuous hitting operation can be brought to the uniform side, and the tilting device 7310 is prevented from being damaged by an unexpected operation (such as an operation in which the continuous hitting speed is excessively increased). be able to.

  Although the case where the locking member 7318 is manually moved has been described in the seventh embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the locking member 7318 may be biased toward the back by a dashpot, and the locking member 7318 and the upper surface portion of the power application member 363 may be inclined at a sliding angle. In this case, when the speed at which the tilting device 7310 is rotated is high, the locking member 7318 is moved by the load in the rotational direction before the locking member 7318 is moved to the near side against the biasing force of the dashpot. When the tilting device 7310 stops while the tilting device 7310 is stopped and the rotation speed of the tilting device 7310 is low, the locking member 7318 is moved forward before the force pressing the locking member 7318 against the power application member 363 increases. Can be moved to the side. Therefore, the locking member 7318 can be automatically moved only when the operation speed is low.

  In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which when the tilting device 7310 stops in the middle of rotation, the tilting device 7310 can be further rotated by moving the locking member 7318a in a direction different from the rotation direction. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the member that stops the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is configured to be able to appear and retract by the notch mechanism, and the notch mechanism is switched in one step by the operation of pushing the tilting device 7310. In the extended state, the tilting device 7310 is stopped halfway and In a state, it is good also as a structure which can be rotationally partitioned to a descent | fall position. In this case, it is possible to perform an operation of stopping the tilting device 7310 during the rotation by an operation in the same direction as the direction in which the tilting device 7310 is pushed.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82 can be attracted from the state in which the tilting device 8310 is disposed at the raised position, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82 may be configured to be attracted from a position where the tilting device 8310 is rotated by 3 ° from the raised position. In this case, when the tilting device 8310 is rotated in a state where the displacement speed of the tilting device 8310 is low (a state where the inertial action member 7319c is stopped relative to the upper cover 8311), the tilting device 8310 is driven by the biasing device 362. The timing at which the displacement resistance of the tilting device 8310 increases can be matched with the timing at which the displacement resistance of the tilting device 8310 increases due to the adsorption of the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82, and the tilting device 8310 has rotated 3 ° from the raised position. In some cases, the amount of increase in load applied to the tilting device 8310 can be increased. Thereby, the player can easily determine the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the stepped member 10362f moves in and out along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, instead of the stepped member 10362f that moves in and out, the member rotates on a rotation axis parallel to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, and the distance from the moving end member 10362d is continuous or discontinuous depending on the phase. You may use the phase change member which changes to.

  The phase change member is formed in a so-called spiral shape, and interferes with the moving end member 10362d in the vertical direction (moving direction of the moving end member 10362d) at the maximum diameter portion, and interferes with the moving end member 10362d in the vertical direction at the minimum diameter portion. No shape. Moreover, the change of the radial direction length of a phase change member arises continuously.

  According to this, if the large-diameter portion of the phase change member is arranged on the moving end member 10362d side, the phase change member and the moving end member 10362d may collide (the stepped member 10362f is in the first position). If the small diameter portion of the phase change member is arranged on the moving end member 10362d side, the phase change member and the moving end member 10362d do not collide (the stepped member 10362f is the second). Corresponds to the state placed in position).

  In the tenth embodiment, the same manner (the phase change member of the phase change member can be obtained by designing the change of the diameter and length of the phase change member according to the conditions, as in the case where the stepping-in / out operation of the stepped member 10362f is performed with a constant operation. The stop position of the moving end member 10362d can be controlled in such a manner that the constant speed rotation is continued.

  In this case, when the phase change member approaches and collides with the moving end member 10362d, the direction of the load applied from the phase changing member to the moving end member 10362d has components in the rotation direction and the rotation axis direction of the phase change member. Inclined direction. Further, the large diameter portion of the phase change member gradually approaches the moving end member 10362d along the rotation direction of the phase change member.

  Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f moves in and out perpendicularly to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d and a load orthogonal to the moving direction is applied to the moving end member 10362d (a case where a large load is instantaneously applied to the moving end member 10362d) ), The change in the magnitude of the load applied to the moving end member 10362d can be moderated. Thereby, durability of the moving end member 10362d and the phase change member can be improved.

  Although the tenth embodiment has been described focusing on one pedal operation of the tilting device 310, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, notification (continuous hitting, sequential pressing, etc.) for operating the tilting device 310 by a plurality of times may be performed. In this case, while the stepped member 10362f is in constant operation, the moving end member 10362d lowered by the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 does not rise (the stepped member 10362f is disposed at the first position before restoration). Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be reduced as the push-in opportunity is increased.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the stepped member 10362f basically operates at a constant level after the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation of the stepped member 10362f may be set to start when the operation of the tilting device 310 is detected. In this case, since the drive solenoid SOL10 that drives the stepped member 10362f does not operate before the tilting device 310 is operated, the operation pattern of the stepped member 10362f can be grasped by the sound generated during driving and the vibration generated during driving. This can be prevented, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved by operating the tilting device 310.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the urging force of the return spring 10362e is extremely small compared to the coil spring 362b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be designed to generate an urging force equivalent to that of the coil spring 362b.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the second tilting device 400 is disposed in a manner straddling the tilting device 12310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed in a lever shape that is fastened and fixed to one of the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 and bent in an L shape (a shape in which the tilting device 400 is divided into left and right at the left and right center). In particular, when fastening and fixing to the left side of the tilting device 310 when viewed from the front, it can be easily operated with the left hand, and can be arranged avoiding a range where the wiring on the launching device side is dense.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case has been described in which the second arm portion 430 of the second tilting device 400 is supported so that the position of the second arm portion 430 can be changed by the engagement with the tip adjustment member 462. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a female screw shape may be formed on the second arm portion 430, and a male screw shape may be formed on the tip adjustment arm portion 462 so that they are loosely fitted. In this case, since the position of the second arm portion 430 is changed by the loose fitting of the screw shape, the contact area between the second arm portion 430 and the tip adjusting member 462 is prevented from being reduced by the position of the second arm portion 430. Can do.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the case has been described where the tilting device 310 does not reach the lowered position even if the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the tilting device 310 may be formed so as to be able to reach the lowered position by pushing the second tilting device 15400.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the case where the spring coefficients of the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e are set to be equal to each other has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the spring coefficient of the coil spring 362b may be set to half the spring coefficient of the return spring 16362e or vice versa. In this case, it is possible to prevent the arrangement space of the coil spring 362b or the return spring 16362e from being limited.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the case where the moving end member 10362d is supported by the lowering device 16362g has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lowering device 16362g and the moving end member 10362d may be connected. In this case, when the operation amount of the tilting device 310 becomes large, the lowering device 16362g and the moving end member 10362d can be prevented from separating. Further, this connection may be formed so as to be releasable. In this case, the lowering device 16362g and the moving end member 10362d can be allowed to be separated only at the time of release.

  In the sixteenth embodiment, the case where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position and the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end of the moving range has been described, but the coil spring 362b is set to the natural length. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be shortened in advance than the natural length. In this case, even if the moving end member 10362d is lowered by the action of the lowering device 16362g, the lowered amount can be compensated by the restoration of the coil spring 362d, and the piston member 362a is maintained at the upper end position of the moving range. Can do. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player can be changed without changing the contact start timing between the tilting device 310 and the piston member 362a.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the moving end member 17362d expands and contracts by the movement of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 as the deformed rotating member 17362g1 rotates. Not. For example, an arbitrary number of thick plates can be inserted or pulled out at any timing between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the upper plate member 17362d2 or between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the lower plate member 17362d3. A plugging device may be provided. In this case, the moving end member 17362d can be expanded and contracted depending on the number of plates to be inserted.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the driving force for moving the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 is generated by the single driving motor 17362g3 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, dedicated driving means may be provided for each of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3. In this case, each of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 can be easily driven independently.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tilting device 310 is exposed to the front has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a protective cover that protects around the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 310. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the player from applying a load around the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 310 by the protective cover, a portion (including the drive motor M1) around the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 310 is damaged. This can be prevented.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lower end of the coil spring 362b is blocked by the bottom cover member 362c of the lower case 360 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the bottom cover member 362c is configured to be movable along the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the coil spring 362b, and the bottom cover member 362c is configured to move (lower) as the tilting device 310 tilts. Also good. In this case, even when the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle from the raised position, it is possible to arbitrarily set a region where the displacement of the coil spring 362b can be reduced as compared with the case where the bottom wall member 362c is fixed. it can.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the tilting device 310 is constantly urged toward the raised position by the urging member such as the torsion spring 343 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the torsion spring 343 is not provided, and another drive device (such as an air ejection device or a one-way drive device) that returns to the initial position may be provided. In this case, the operation of the tilting device 310 after the player releases his hand from the tilting device 310 during the operation can be arbitrarily set.

  For example, when a rotational resistance is applied to the tilting device 310 by a magnetic force, when the hand is released at a position less than a predetermined angle from the ascending position, the tilting device 310 is stopped on the spot, while at least a predetermined angle from the rising position. When the hand is released at the position (for example, depending on the arrangement of the center of gravity), it may be configured to continue to the lowered position. Thereby, the tilting device 310 can be operated in an unexpected operation mode, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the weight member M1a has a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the circumferential direction, and the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axial direction is formed in a fan shape having the rotation axis as a vertex. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the circumferential direction of the weight member M1a may be an elliptical shape. In this case, since the portion closest to the weight members M1a arranged opposite to each other can be brought close to the rotation shaft, the possibility that the weight members M1a come into contact with each other when the drive motors M1 are arranged close to each other is reduced. Can do.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of a technical idea that suppresses changes in the operational angle of the tilting device>
In a gaming machine including an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means includes an operated means to be input by the player and an adjusting means for adjusting a load received by the player who has performed the input operation. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the adjusting means suppresses an increase in load received by a player who has performed an input operation in at least a part of the movement range of the operated means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the player is provided with operated means for performing a push-in operation, and an urging force for returning the operated means to the initial position increases according to the push-in amount of the operated means. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-014571). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to cope with a case where the movement distance of the operated means becomes long. That is, in order to improve the operational feeling felt by the player, it is desirable to increase the rate of increase of the urging force with respect to the movement distance of the operated means from the initial position. However, if the moving distance of the operated means increases, When the player receives an excessive load and the player who performs the operation becomes tired, there is a problem in that pushing of the operated means is stopped during the game.

  In this case, it is not possible to show the player the effect that the state of the liquid crystal display device changes by pushing the operated means, and the player's interest may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the adjusting means suppresses an increase in the load received by the player who has performed the input operation at least in a part of the movement range of the operated means, the load received by the player Can be suppressed and the player can be prevented from getting tired.

  In addition, as a case where the movement distance of the operated means becomes long, for example, when the pushed amount of the operated means is detected and reflected in the operation, the operated means is an arc trajectory (not a linear trajectory), or a zigzag trajectory. The case where it operates by is illustrated.

  For example, when detecting the amount of push-in and reflecting it in the operation, it is easier to maintain the target push-in amount by increasing the distance between the detection boundaries, and the game can be promoted comfortably. There is a high possibility that the moving distance of the operating means will be long.

  The gaming machine A1 includes urging means for generating an urging force that moves the operated means toward an initial position, and the urging means has a first elasticity that causes displacement along the movement path of the operated means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a spring member, wherein the adjusting means suppresses a load received by the player in a range after the operated means has moved a predetermined distance from the initial position.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the biasing means is constituted by the first elastic spring member that is displaced along the movement path of the operated means, and the operated means is moved from the initial position. Since the load received by the player in the range after the predetermined distance is moved, the player feels the operation feeling by increasing the load felt by the player in proportion to the distance that the player has moved the operated means. , The player can recognize the point at which the rate of increase in the load applied to the player is switched in the range after the predetermined distance from the initial position (for example, the point at which the proportionality constant has changed).

  Thereby, by using the change point of the load given to the player as a mark, it is possible to easily move the operated means to an arbitrary point in the movement range of the operated means.

  As the first elastic spring member, when the operated means rotates around a predetermined rotation axis, a torsion spring around the rotation axis or an arc around the rotation axis of the operated means A coil spring or the like that is curvedly arranged along the shape wall portion is exemplified, and when the operated means translates, a coil spring provided along the moving direction of the operated means is exemplified. The

  In the gaming machine A2, the operated means is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis, and the adjusting means includes a second elastic spring member that applies a load to the operated means from the circumferential direction, and the second elastic spring The member is configured to apply an urging force to the operated means by contacting the operated means and moving while the operated means is moved, and the direction of displacement of the second elastic spring member is A gaming machine A3 characterized by being along a tangential direction of an arbitrary arc around the rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the operated means is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis, and the second elastic spring member abuts during the movement of the operated means to generate the biasing force. Since the displacement direction is along the tangential direction of an arbitrary arc centering on the rotation axis, after the operated means and the second elastic spring member are in contact, the contact point is determined as the rotation angle of the operated means. Accordingly, the displacement of the second elastic spring member can be changed in a manner different from the angle change rate of the operated means. Therefore, the load applied to the operated means from the second elastic spring member can be arbitrarily set by changing the shape of the contact point of the operated means in various ways.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operated means includes a contact portion that is disposed to face the second elastic spring member and is configured to be able to contact the second elastic spring member. A first contact point that contacts the second elastic spring member in the first state where the operating means is moved a predetermined distance from the initial position, and the elastic spring member in the second state where the operating means is further moved in the same direction from the first state. A second abutting point that abuts with the first abutting point, and the second abutting point is more initial than the first abutting point than the straight line passing through the rotation shaft and the first abutting point. A gaming machine A4, which is arranged on the position side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the second contact point is more operated than the first contact point of the contact portion than the straight line passing through the rotation shaft and the first contact point. For example, compared with a case where the second contact point is disposed on a straight line passing through the first contact point and the rotation shaft, the operated means from the first state to the second state is provided. The amount of displacement of the second elastic spring member can be suppressed more than the distance by which the portion in the vicinity of contact with the second elastic spring member is displaced when the is rotated. Thereby, the load given to the operated means by the second elastic spring member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A4, the shape of the second contact point is set in a manner in which the displacement amount of the second elastic spring member is reduced in the second state compared to the first state. A gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the shape of the second contact point is set in such a manner that the displacement amount of the second elastic spring member is reduced in the second state compared to the first state. Therefore, the load that the second elastic spring member gives to the operated means in the second state can be made smaller than the load that the second elastic spring member gives to the operated means in the first state. Accordingly, the biasing force of the first elastic spring member that rises as the operated means moves from the first state to the second state is partially offset by the decrease in the load that the second elastic spring member applies to the operated means. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the second elastic spring member is configured to be changeable in posture, and the direction of the posture change increases as the displacement amount of the first elastic spring member increases. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the angle formed by the moving direction of the operated means and the moving direction of the operated means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the second elastic spring member is configured to be capable of changing the posture, and the direction of the posture change is determined by the amount of displacement of the first elastic spring member. Since the angle between the moving direction of the second elastic spring member and the moving direction of the operated means increases as the force increases, the second elastic spring member increases as the biasing force of the first elastic spring member increases. Among the urging forces, the component loaded on the operated means can be reduced. Thereby, the raise of the load which a player feels can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A6, when the second elastic spring member is connected to the operated means, the relationship of the attitude of the second elastic spring member to the attitude of the operated means is associated one-to-one. Characteristic gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the second elastic spring member is connected to the operated means, so that the relationship between the attitude of the second elastic spring member with respect to the attitude of the operated means is 1: 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second elastic spring member from changing its posture in an unexpected direction by applying a sudden load to the operated means.

<An example of a technical idea for changing the rate of change of the rotational resistance of the tilting device>
In a gaming machine comprising an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means is a change to change an operation means to be input by the player and a rate of change of a load applied to the player from the operated means. And a gaming machine B1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in a mode in which a player has an operated means for performing a pushing operation, and the input is switched in accordance with the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine to be controlled (for example, see JP 2012-024322 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since it is difficult for the player to recognize the push amount, it is necessary to separately provide a scale on the liquid crystal display device in order to make the player grasp the push amount. There was a point.

  In this case, even if the effect of designating the push amount is performed, it is necessary to operate the operated means while paying attention to the scale, so that the other part of the board surface of the game board (for example, the flow of the shot ball) There was a problem that it was impossible to send a line of sight to the game and it was impossible to play the game as intended.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the change means for changing the rate of change of the load given to the player from the operated means is provided, the operated means is placed on the player at a predetermined position with the change in the load as a mark. It can be grasped that it was pushed in. As a result, the player can grasp that the operated means has been pushed to a predetermined position without looking at the scale, so that the player can move the operated means to any place on the board surface of the game board while operating the operated means. You can pay attention.

  In the gaming machine B1, the changing means is arranged facing the action portion of the operated means in a state where the operated means is arranged at a start position separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance. A gaming machine B2 that is configured in such a manner that a load is applied to the player through the means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the changing means is arranged to face the action portion of the operated means in a state where the operated means is arranged at a start position separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance. In this state, the player starts to apply a load via the operated means, so that the operated means is arranged at the start position so that the player feels the load from the operated means without providing another driving means. Can be changed at the border.

  As a result, the load on the player can be changed reliably without being affected by poor control, and the change can be used as a mark for the player to grasp the amount of pushing of the operated means. can do.

  In the gaming machine B2, the changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that applies a load in the moving direction of the operated means, and the elastic spring member is an initial stage before contacting the action portion of the operated means. A gaming machine B3 that is arranged in a state that is displaced from the natural length by a predetermined distance.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that applies a load in the moving direction of the operated means, and the elastic spring member is applied to the action portion of the operated means. Since it is arranged in a state where it is displaced by a predetermined distance from the natural length in the initial state before contact, the elastic spring member is attached to the operated means immediately before and after the operated means is brought into contact with the elastic spring member. Since the elastic force corresponding to the displacement is applied at a time, the load applied to the player can be rapidly changed. Accordingly, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the operated means has passed through the state where the operated means is disposed at a predetermined position from the change in the load applied from the operated means.

  In the gaming machine B3, when the contact point between the action part and the elastic spring member changes with the movement of the operated means, the action part is a section that first contacts the elastic spring member. A first abutting section, and a second abutting section that is a section that abuts the elastic spring member after the first abutting section, and the first abutting section of the action portion and the elastic spring member Compared to the case where the operated means moves by a predetermined amount in a state where the operating means abuts, the operated means moves by a predetermined amount in a state where the second contact section of the acting portion and the elastic spring member are in contact with each other. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the amount of increase in the load given to the player is reduced when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the first operating portion is compared with a case where the operated portion is moved by a predetermined amount while contacting the elastic spring member in the first contact section. The amount of increase in the load applied to the player is reduced when the operated means is moved by a predetermined amount while being in contact with the elastic spring member in the second contact section where the pushing amount is larger than the contact section. In addition, while maintaining the effect of easily recognizing that the operated means is disposed at the predetermined position, it is possible to prevent an excessive load felt by the player after the operated means passes the predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine B2, the action portion is configured to include a magnetic material, and the changing means is configured of a magnetic load member disposed to face a part of the movement path of the action portion, and the magnetic load member is A gaming machine B5 comprising magnetism that generates an attractive force with respect to the magnetic material constituting the action portion.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the change in the load applied to the operated means is caused by the magnetic force (adsorption force) generated between the acting part and the magnetic load member. It is possible to make it easier for the player to feel a change in load between when the magnetic load member is near and when the magnetic load member is far away.

  Although the load when the player pushes the operated means increases, when the player performs a maintenance operation, etc., the action part is attracted to the magnetic load member, so that it is given to the player from the operated means. The load is reduced. Therefore, compared with the case where the load applied to the operated means is increased by the biasing force of the elastic spring, the force required for the player to maintain the position of the operated means is reduced, and the player feels tired. Can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the operated means includes a moving means configured to be relatively movable with respect to the operated means, and a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the moving member. The moving member can be configured to be in a first state and a second state after moving to a position different from the first state, at least the moving member being in the first state and the second state. A gaming machine B6 that is configured to be capable of changing a load given to the player when the time changes.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the load applied to the player can be changed by changing the state of the moving means, so that the operated means is arranged at a predetermined position. By operating the driving means when it is detected that this has been detected, the load applied to the player can be changed, and the player can recognize the current push position of the operated means.

  In the gaming machine B6, when the drive means is composed of a rotary motor, and the rotary motor rotates forward, the moving member is moved relative to the operated means, and when the rotary motor rotates reversely. The gaming machine B7, wherein the moving member stops relative to the operated means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, it is possible to configure a case where the load applied to the gaming machine changes depending on the rotation direction of the rotary motor, and a case where the load does not change. Without checking the vibration transmitted to a part of the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the way of playing the game to check the internal state, and to increase the significance of operating the operated means. Thereby, the operated means can be effectively utilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the input means is movable in a direction that intersects an input direction of the operated means and a vibrating means that vibrates the operated means, and is connected to the operated means. An operation unit arranged and operable by a player, wherein the changing unit transmits an operation driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the operation unit, and transmits the driving force of the operation driving unit to the operation unit. Transmitting means, and when the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is longer than the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is short. The gaming machine B8 is characterized by comprising switching means for increasing vibration transmission efficiency of the vibration means to the operated means.

  Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibration means, the vibration given to the player when the player operates is more likely to bring the vibration means closer to the part operated by the player. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation part is a position where the impact at the time of the operation is the largest, if the vibration means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during the operation. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to ensure both a feeling of vibration and a long service life of the vibration means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance becomes long while securing the distance between the vibration means and the operation unit.

  In addition, measures to reduce the feeling of vibration by separating the player's fingers from the vibration means while increasing the operation target by separating the operation unit from the operated means and making it easy for the player to operate the input means. As described above, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to ensure (level) the vibration applied to the player who touches the input means.

  As a result, the operation unit moves away from the operated means, and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation where the expectation is high in appearance (so-called “super hot” situation) The uncomfortable feeling due to the extremely weak feeling can be eliminated.

  Note that the expectation includes a reach development expectation and a jackpot occurrence expectation. Here, the reach development expectation is a ratio, possibility or expectation to develop into reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is a ratio, possibility or expectation that a jackpot is generated.

  Note that the sense of vibration includes a sense of vibration received by a player who touched the member through the member, or a sense received by other senses (for example, vision) without touching the member (for example, of the member). Sense of understanding that it is vibrating by the presence of an afterimage in the vicinity.

  In the gaming machine B8, the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed increases or decreases depending on a location, and the operation driving means is arranged on a side where the speed of the operated means is reduced. Game machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B8, when a severe operation such as hitting the operated means is performed, the impact given to the operation driving means is maintained while maintaining the intensity of the operation. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an operation mode in which the level of the operation speed varies depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported and does not rotate in the circumferential direction of a circle around the axis, or is not supported. In both cases, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B8 or B9, the operation unit is separated from the operated unit by the driving force of the operation driving unit, and the switching unit includes a changing unit that can connect the operated unit and the operating unit. The degree changing means generates a biasing force that moves the operation portion in a direction approaching the operated means, and the biasing force is a distance between the operated means and the operating portion. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that it rises as the length increases.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8 or B9, by generating a biasing force that the degree changing means fluctuates, the operation unit can be maintained on the side close to the operated means, and the operated means Adjusts the buffering action of vibration transmission between the control unit and the operating part (keeps the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating part are arranged close to each other, and reduces the buffering action when arranged at a distance) )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

  In addition, the aspect of a grade change means is not specifically limited. For example, it may be formed from a metal elastic spring or an air spring.

  In any one of the gaming machines B8 to B10, the switching unit approaches the vibrating unit along a direction intersecting a moving direction of the operated unit as the operating unit moves away from the operated unit, and at least the And a second transmission means that can be brought into contact with the vibration means when the operating portion is farthest from the operated means, wherein the displacing means places the operating portion with respect to the operated means. A gaming machine B11 comprising a connecting means for operably connecting along a direction crossing the moving direction.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B8 to B10, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means Therefore, it is possible to easily give the player who touches the operation unit the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means.

  For example, when the operation mode of the operated means is a rotation operation around a predetermined axis, vibration in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because there is no moment relation), large vibrations transmitted to the player can be ensured even when the operation unit is away from the operated means.

  Note that the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit can be changed. Thereby, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed. Can be achieved.

  For example, when the operation driving means, the transmission means, and the second transmission means are accommodated in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the transmission path of the driving force is changed by the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance is increased. Can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines B8 to B11, the transmission unit includes a release unit that cancels transmission of driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation driving unit. Game machine B12.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B8 to B11, the operation driving means is overloaded by the player operating the operation unit with an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as failure. Thereby, the freedom degree of operation of an operation part can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B8 to B12, the operated means is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable along the input direction, and the operating portion is separated from a rotation axis of the operated means, A gaming machine B13 characterized in that it is away from the means.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B8 to B12, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is determined by the movement of the operating unit by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force given to the player who operates an operation part can be changed according to the movement amount of an operation part.

  Also, the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit when the operation target is the largest distance from the operated means (the operation range becomes the largest and easy to operate) is reduced. Therefore, the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation can be reduced. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation unit.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the changing unit includes a biasing unit that generates a biasing force along an operation direction of the operated unit, and the biasing unit is associated with the movement of the operated unit. A first state in which the amount of movement of the operated means from the predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the urging means are kept equal, and the amount of deformation of the urging means from the predetermined state. A gaming machine B14 that is switchable between a second state that is less than a movement amount of the operated means.

  According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control the elastic coefficient of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed in accordance with the operation timing.

  In addition, the aspect of the load change with respect to the deformation amount is not limited at all. For example, a linear change mode (such as an elastic spring) or a non-linear deformation mode may be used.

  In the gaming machine B14, the changing means is disposed on the urging means and disposed on the operation side portion that contacts the operated means, and on the opposite side of the urging means to the operation side portion. It is possible to change at least one of a supported main body side portion, a contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, or a support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion during an input operation. And a position change means.

  According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B14, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operation length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the biasing means during the input operation. The rate of change of the load given to the player as the reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

  In the gaming machine B15, the position changing means is a first state in which the state is fixed close to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the urging means, and the first state in which the state is released is released. A moving means capable of switching between the two states by movement; a movement driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means; and a control means for controlling a driving mode of the movement driving means. Game machine B16.

  According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B15, it is possible to perform control to change the support position by the position changing means by driving the movement driving means based on the control means. Therefore, the load applied to the player via the biasing means can be changed by control.

  In addition, you may make it cancel | release the support of either edge part of a biasing means. In addition, when canceling the support point on the pedal side, it is essential to move along the peripheral surface (not in a mode of being pushed by the operation tip surface).

  In addition, when the moving direction of a pedal and the moving direction of a moving means are orthogonal, it can suppress that the reaction force given to a player at the time of operation changes to the drive timing of a moving means.

  In the gaming machine B15 or B16, a change in at least one of a contact position between the operated means and the operation side part or a support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side part is an operation of the operated means. A gaming machine B17 generated by the execution of

  According to the gaming machine B17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B15 or B16, a change in the urging force (the degree of change) of the urging means is caused by the player operating the operated means (that is, the attached means). Since the state of the biasing means is not changed in advance), it is possible to prevent the biasing force of the biasing means from being noticed from the state (for example, the appearance) of the operated means before the operation, The operation of the operated means can be promoted.

  In addition, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, it is possible to easily change the change mode of the urging force depending on the operation mode.

<An example of a technical idea that a player receives a large load when the rotation speed of the tilting device is large>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means can be operated by the player to perform an input operation, and a load can be applied to the operated means as a movement resistance and the load can be changed. A load changing means configured, and when the operated means is displaceable at a first speed and a second speed larger than the first speed, Compared with the load applied to the operated means from the load changing means when displaced at the first speed, the load applied to the operated means from the load changing means when displaced at the second speed A gaming machine C1 characterized in that is increased.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in a mode in which a player has an operated means for performing a pushing operation, and the input is switched in accordance with the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine to be controlled (for example, see JP 2012-024322 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when an operation of moving the operated means to a predetermined position is performed, the operation period is extended by slightly reducing the speed in order to prevent passing the predetermined position. For example, when it is noticed that an operation is requested just before the end of the operable period, there is a problem that the operation may not be in time.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, compared with the case where the operated means is displaced at the first speed, the case where the operated means is displaced from the load changing means when the displacement is performed at the second speed larger than the first speed. Since the load given as resistance to the operating means is large, even if the operated means is operated with a strong force (high acceleration) and the speed of the operated means increases, the operated means is released after the operating force is released. It is possible to shorten the distance required until the vehicle is stopped. As a result, it becomes unnecessary to operate the operated means by reducing the speed of the operated means, and the operation period of the operated means can be shortened, so that it is noticed that the operation is requested at the end of the operable period. Even in the case, the operation can be made in time.

  The load changing means is not particularly limited, and for example, a commercially available product that changes the load with respect to the displacement speed of the action portion, such as a rotary damper, can be arbitrarily selected and used. . The feature of this gaming machine C1 is that load changing means is arranged in the gaming machine even if it becomes late for the player to notice that the gaming machine side is required to push the operated means. Thus, it is possible to immediately operate the operated means to the target position.

  In the gaming machine C1, the operated means changes the input mode at least between the first input and the second input depending on the amount of displacement, and the load change is within a range where the first input is performed. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that a change in load applied from the means is suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the input mode of the operated means is changed between the first input and the second input depending on the amount of displacement, and in the range where the first input is performed. Since the change of the load given from the load changing means is suppressed, it is possible to cope with the case where the function of the load changing means is obstructed by the input mode.

  For example, the button that is the first input is configured such that the operated means performs a button pressing operation including a continuous hitting operation by the first input and a pedal pressing operation for detecting the displacement amount by the second input. If the resistance of the displacement of the operated device is increased by vigorously pushing, the return of the operated device will be delayed by vigorously pushing the button, which may interfere with the continuous hitting operation. You can only wait until the instrument returns to its original position and then press it, which may make it difficult to hit repeatedly).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, the displacement resistance of the operated means is suppressed from being increased by the load changing means in the range where the first input is performed. The return speed of the operated means is prevented from being delayed by the speed of the displacement, and the continuous hitting operation can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the load changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that can be displaced by a load transmitted from the operated means, and the operated means is a portion that is disposed to face the elastic spring member. A first portion that is in contact with the elastic spring member so that a load can be transmitted, and a portion different from the first portion and the load is not transmitted between the elastic spring member. A gaming machine C3, wherein the second part is disposed between at least a pair of the first parts.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the load changing means is constituted by an elastic spring member that can be displaced by a load transmitted from the operated means, and the operated means is elastic. A portion that is disposed opposite to the spring member and is in contact with the elastic spring member so that a load can be transmitted between the first portion and a portion different from the first portion and between the elastic spring member And the second part is disposed between at least the pair of first parts, so that the second part passes through the part opposed to the operated means. The load applied to the operated means can be adjusted by the length of the above.

  In other words, the period during which the operated means passes while the second part between the pair of first parts is opposed to the elastic spring member is shorter than the period until the displacement given to the elastic spring member has completely returned. For example, the displacement given to the elastic spring member by the first portion after passing through the second portion abutting and moving is added to the remaining displacement without returning to the elastic spring member. Compared with the case where the elastic spring member is displaced from, the load applied to the operated means becomes large.

  On the other hand, the period during which the operated means passes while the second part between the pair of first parts is opposed to the elastic spring member is longer than the period until the displacement given to the elastic spring member is completely returned. If it is long, the displacement given to the elastic spring member when the first portion after passing through the second portion abuts and moves is the displacement from the natural length, so the load given to the operated means becomes small. As a result, the load applied to the operated means from the elastic spring member can be adjusted by the magnitude of the speed at which the operated means moves while the second portion is disposed opposite the elastic spring member.

  In the gaming machine C3, a plurality of the first parts are arranged and the second part is arranged between the first parts, and the length of the first part along the moving direction of the operated means is When the operated means moves from the initial position, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member later is longer than a portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, a plurality of first parts are arranged and a second part is arranged between the first parts, and the movement direction of the operated means of the first part When the operated means is moved from the initial position, the length of the portion to be contacted later with respect to the elastic spring member is longer than the length of the portion to be operated first. It is possible to ensure a wide range in which the first portion of 1 gives an elastic load to the operated means at a position far from the initial position where the deviation of the operated means from the target position is likely to increase greatly by moving the means too much. If the operating force is released after the operated means is moved too much, it can be easily returned to the target position with an elastic load, and the portion near the initial position where the speed is unlikely to be excessive is elastic. In contact with the spring member Load Te can be prevented that the player becomes excessive is easily tired.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the operated portion moves in a direction away from the initial position, the elastic spring member is moved to the operated device when the first portion is moved against the elastic spring member. In the case where the elastic load of the member is transmitted and the first portion moves while contacting the elastic spring member while the operated means moves toward the initial position, A gaming machine C5, wherein an elastic load by the elastic spring member is not transmitted to the means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, whether or not an elastic load is transmitted from the elastic spring member to the operated means changes depending on the direction in which the operated means moves. The degree of deceleration when the operated means moves by bringing the first portion into contact with the elastic spring member can be changed depending on the moving direction.

  That is, when the operated means moves in a direction away from the initial position, it is possible to suppress an increase in moving speed by applying an elastically increasing load as a resistance, while the operated means is in the initial position. In the case of moving toward the position, it is possible to suppress the resistance from being reduced and the movement speed from being lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the load applied from the load changing unit to the operated unit becomes excessive, a blocking unit that blocks transmission of the load from the load changing unit to the operated unit A gaming machine C6 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the load applied from the load changing means to the operated means becomes excessive, the load from the load changing means to the operated means Therefore, the upper limit of the load applied to the player via the operated means can be determined. Thereby, it can suppress that the load which a to-be-operated means gives to a player becomes excessive, and the operating burden of a player raises.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a fixed wall provided along with the operated means along the movement path of the operated means, and movable in a manner of approaching and separating from the fixed wall and the operated means And the auxiliary operation member is disposed at a position separated from the fixed wall when the operated means is operated at the first speed, and the When the operating means is operated at the second speed, the gaming machine C7 is configured to be moved close to the fixed wall and to come into contact with the fixed wall.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the fixed wall is provided along the movement path of the operated means, and the auxiliary operation member disposed in the operated means is the fixed wall. The friction generated by the movement of the operated means in a state where the auxiliary operation member and the fixed wall are in contact with each other is determined. The load applied to the player through the operated means can be changed by the amount of force.

  When the operated means is moved at the first speed, contact between the auxiliary operation member and the fixed wall does not occur. Therefore, compared with a case where load changing means is provided that causes contact even when moved at the first speed. Thus, when the operated means is moved at the first speed, it is possible to prevent a slight load increase / decrease.

  In addition, as a movement mode of the auxiliary operation member, a mode in which the operated unit moves directly in a direction approaching the fixed wall by an inertial force (centrifugal force) at the time of movement of the operated unit, Examples include a mode in which another member that moves relative to the direction is provided, the fixing mechanism is detached by the movement of the other member, and the member moves in a direction approaching the fixing wall.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the input means is movable in a direction intersecting with an input direction of the operated means and a vibrating means that vibrates the operated means, and the operated means An operation unit arranged and operable by a player, wherein the changing unit transmits an operation driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the operation unit, and transmits the driving force of the operation driving unit to the operation unit. Transmitting means, and when the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is longer than the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is short. The game machine C8 is characterized by comprising switching means for increasing the vibration transmission efficiency of the vibration means to the operated means.

  Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibration means, the vibration given to the player when the player operates is more likely to bring the vibration means closer to the part operated by the player. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation part is a position where the impact at the time of the operation is the largest, if the vibration means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during the operation. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to ensure both a feeling of vibration and a long service life of the vibration means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance becomes long while securing the distance between the vibration means and the operation unit.

  In addition, measures to reduce the feeling of vibration by separating the player's fingers from the vibration means while increasing the operation target by separating the operation unit from the operated means and making it easy for the player to operate the input means. As described above, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to ensure (level) the vibration applied to the player who touches the input means.

  As a result, the operation unit moves away from the operated means, and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation where the expectation is high in appearance (so-called “super hot” situation) The uncomfortable feeling due to the extremely weak feeling can be eliminated.

  Note that the expectation includes a reach development expectation and a jackpot occurrence expectation. Here, the reach development expectation is a ratio, possibility or expectation to develop into reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is a ratio, possibility or expectation that a jackpot is generated.

  Note that the sense of vibration includes a sense of vibration received by a player who touched the member through the member, or a sense received by other senses (for example, vision) without touching the member (for example, of the member). Sense of understanding that it is vibrating by the presence of an afterimage in the vicinity.

  In the gaming machine C8, the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed increases or decreases depending on a location, and the operation driving means is arranged on a side where the speed of the operated means is reduced. Game machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C8, when a severe operation such as hitting the operated device is performed, the impact given to the operation driving device is maintained while maintaining the intensity of the operation. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an operation mode in which the level of the operation speed varies depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported and does not rotate in the circumferential direction of a circle around the axis, or is not supported. In both cases, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the operation unit is separated from the operated unit by the driving force of the operation driving unit, and the switching unit includes a changing unit that can connect the operated unit and the operating unit. The degree changing means generates a biasing force that moves the operation portion in a direction approaching the operated means, and the biasing force is a distance between the operated means and the operating portion. The gaming machine C10 is characterized by increasing as the length increases.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8 or C9, by generating a biasing force that the degree changing means fluctuates, the operation unit can be maintained on the side close to the operated means, and the operated means Adjusts the buffering action of vibration transmission between the control unit and the operating part (keeps the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating part are arranged close to each other, and reduces the buffering action when arranged at a distance) )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

  In addition, the aspect of a grade change means is not specifically limited. For example, it may be formed from a metal elastic spring or an air spring.

  In any one of the gaming machines C8 to C10, the switching unit approaches the vibrating unit along a direction intersecting a moving direction of the operated unit as the operating unit moves away from the operated unit, and at least the And a second transmission means that can be brought into contact with the vibration means when the operating portion is farthest from the operated means, wherein the displacing means places the operating portion with respect to the operated means. A gaming machine C11 comprising a connecting means that is operatively connected along a direction that intersects the moving direction.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C8 to C10, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means Therefore, it is possible to easily give the player who touches the operation unit the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means.

  For example, when the operation mode of the operated means is a rotation operation around a predetermined axis, vibration in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because there is no moment relation), large vibrations transmitted to the player can be ensured even when the operation unit is away from the operated means.

  Note that the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit can be changed. Thereby, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed. Can be achieved.

  For example, when the operation driving means, the transmission means, and the second transmission means are accommodated in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the transmission path of the driving force is changed by the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance is increased. Can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines C8 to C11, the transmission unit includes a release unit that cancels transmission of the driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation driving unit. Game machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C8 to C11, an overload occurs in the operation driving means due to the player operating the operation unit with an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as failure. Thereby, the freedom degree of operation of an operation part can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines C8 to C12, the operated means is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable along the input direction, and the operating portion is separated from a rotation axis of the operated means, A gaming machine C13 characterized by moving away from means.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C8 to C12, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is determined by the movement of the operating portion by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force given to the player who operates an operation part can be changed according to the movement amount of an operation part.

  Also, the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit when the operation target is the largest distance from the operated means (the operation range becomes the largest and easy to operate) is reduced. Therefore, the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation can be reduced. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation unit.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the load changing unit includes a biasing unit that generates a biasing force along an operation direction of the operated unit, and the biasing unit is configured to move the operated unit. A first state that is configured to be deformable and maintains the amount of movement of the operated means from the predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the biasing means equal, and the amount of deformation of the biasing means from the predetermined state The gaming machine C14 is characterized in that it can be switched between a second state in which the amount is less than the amount of movement of the operated means.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control the elastic coefficient of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed in accordance with the operation timing.

  In addition, the aspect of the load change with respect to the deformation amount is not limited at all. For example, a linear change mode (such as an elastic spring) or a non-linear deformation mode may be used.

  In the gaming machine C14, the load changing means is disposed on the urging means and disposed on the operation side portion that contacts the operated means, and on the opposite side of the urging means to the operation side portion. During the input operation, at least one of the main body side portion supported by the control unit, the contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion, A game machine C15, comprising: position changing means that can change the biasing force of the biasing means to a side where the biasing force is weakened.

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C14, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operation length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the biasing means during the input operation. The rate of change of the load given to the player as the reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

  In the gaming machine C15, the position changing means is a first state in which the state is fixed in proximity to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the biasing means, and the first state in which the state is released is released. A moving means capable of switching between the two states by movement; a movement driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means; and a control means for controlling the driving mode of the movement driving means. The gaming machine C16 is characterized in that the moving means is maintained in the first state only for a time required to complete the operation when the operated means is operated at least at the second speed.

  According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C15, when the operated means is operated at the second speed, the contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, and the gaming machine main body and the main body side There is a possibility of completing the operation without changing both the support position and the support position. In this case, a load applied to the player as a reaction force of the urging means can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine C16, the position changing means can change at least one of a contact position between the operated means and the operation side part or a support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side part in a plurality of stages. The control means moves the moving means in such a manner that the contact position and the support position cannot be changed in a plurality of stages while the position changing means is maintained in the second state. Characteristic gaming machine C17.

  According to the gaming machine C17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C16, there are a plurality of stages of changes in at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operation side part or the support position between the gaming machine body and the body side part. And a change in a plurality of steps is prevented while the moving means is maintained in the second state, so that the hand and the operated means are compared with the case where the operated means is operated at the second speed. The amount of change in the load applied to the player when operating at the first speed can be increased.

  In the gaming machine C17, at least one of a contact position between the operated means and the operation side part or a support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side part is changed at a predetermined stage. A gaming machine C18, wherein the urging force generated from the urging means toward the operated means disappears.

  According to the gaming machine C18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C17, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operation side part or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the body side part is in a predetermined stage. When changed, the reaction force generated by the urging means out of the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operated means disappears, so that the player can easily notice the change in the reaction force.

  In any one of the gaming machines C16 to C18, a change in at least one of a contact position between the operated means and the operation side part or a support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side part is the operated A gaming machine C19 generated by execution of an operation of means.

  According to the gaming machine C19, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines C16 to C18, a change in the biasing force (the degree of change) of the biasing means occurs when the player operates the operated means ( That is, since the state of the biasing means is not changed in advance), it is prevented that the biasing force of the biasing means changes from the state of the operated means before the operation (for example, appearance). Thus, the operation of the operated means can be promoted.

  Further, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, the urging force (that is, the reaction force given to the player) is easily made different depending on the operation mode. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines C15 to C19, the game machine includes notification means for notifying the player of an operation of the input means for a predetermined period, and in the first period before the notification by the notification means ends, the load changing means A gaming machine C20 characterized by operating.

  According to the gaming machine C20, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C15 to C19, the feeling of fatigue given to the player by the operation of the input means is reduced by keeping the period for increasing the load on the operation to the minimum necessary. Can be reduced. Thereby, the stress given to the player when operating the input means can be reduced, and the possibility (or probability) that the player will participate in the game by operating the input means can be increased.

<An example of a technical idea that the load on the player is reduced when the rotation speed of the tilting device is high>
In a gaming machine including an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies an input operation to the player, and applies a load as a movement resistance to the operated means and changes the load. Load changing means, and when the operated means is displaced at a first speed and a second speed larger than the first speed, the operated means is moved to the operated means when displaced at the first speed. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the load given from the load changing means to the operated means is made smaller when displaced at the second speed than the load given from the load changing means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in a mode in which a player has an operated means for performing a pushing operation, and the input is switched in accordance with the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine to be controlled (for example, see JP 2012-024322 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when an operation for moving the operated means to the middle of the moving range and an operation for pushing it to the end at once are required, a resistance suitable for both can be applied. There was a problem that it was difficult.

  That is, when the operated means is moved to the middle of the movement range and maintained, the greater the resistance of the operated means, the easier it is to adjust the player's force that applies a load to the operated means, In the case of performing an operation to push in all the way to the end, the operation can be performed more comfortably as the movement resistance is smaller, so that there is a problem that conflicting performance is required.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine D1 is provided with load changing means for applying a load as movement resistance to the operated means and changing the load, and compared with a case where the moving speed of the operated means is set to the first speed. When the operated means moves at a second speed larger than the first speed, the load applied from the load changing means is reduced, so that the operated means is displaced at the first speed. The position of the operated means can be easily maintained, and when the operated means is displaced at the second speed, the operated means can be easily pushed at once.

  In the gaming machine D1, the load changing means includes a braking auxiliary member that moves in a direction approaching the operated means by an urging force, and the braking auxiliary member contacts the operated means to contact the operated means. A configuration in which the contact position between the brake assisting member and the operated means moves away from the initial position of the brake assisting member as a movement resistance is applied and the operated means moves away from the initial position. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the braking auxiliary member that applies a load as a movement resistance to the operated means by contacting the operated means is such that the operated means moves away from the initial position. Since the abutting position between the braking assisting member and the operated means is further away from the initial position of the braking assisting member as the movement is made, before the braking assisting member catches up with the abutting position after the operated means is moved. Further, by moving the operated means at a speed at which the operated means is moved, it is possible to suppress transmission of a load as movement resistance from the braking assisting member to the operated means.

  In the gaming machine D2, the operated means is configured to rotate around a predetermined rotation axis, the braking assisting member is brought into contact with the side wall portion along the movement path of the operated means, and the side wall portion is initially Compared to the first contact point that contacts the brake assisting member first when the operated means moves from the position, the second contact point that contacts the brake assisting member thereafter is the first contact point. A gaming machine D3, wherein the gaming machine D3 is disposed inside a circle centered on the predetermined rotation axis passing through the contact.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D2, a point that can come into contact with the brake assisting member after the first contact point passes through the first contact point and is a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis. As the operated means moves from the initial position, the arm of the moment generated by the load applied from the braking auxiliary member to the operated means can be shortened, and the rotational resistance of the operated means can be reduced. Can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a fixed wall provided along the movement path of the operated means, and the load changing means is an inertia member elastically supported by the operated means, and the inertia member is When the actuator is stopped relative to the operating means, it is brought into contact with the fixed wall, while the inertia member is separated from the fixed wall when the inertia member moves relative to the operated means. A game machine D4, comprising: an auxiliary operation member to be operated.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the load changing means includes an inertia member elastically supported by the operated means, and a fixed wall according to the movement of the inertia member relative to the operated means. An auxiliary operation member that changes whether it abuts or separates, and the auxiliary operation member is separated from the fixed wall when the inertia member moves relative to the operated device, so that the auxiliary operation member is the same as the operated device. While it is easy to move at a low speed, it is easy to apply a load as a movement resistance when moving at a low speed, while it is possible to reduce the load as a high-speed movement resistance that the auxiliary operation member is likely to be placed on the operated means. it can.

  In the gaming machine D4, the operated means is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis, and the inertia member moves along a rotation locus at an end portion of the operated means opposite to the rotation axis. A gaming machine D5 that is supported.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D4, when the operated means is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and the operated means is moved at high speed, An inertia member is arranged at the opposite end of the rotation axis where the movement distance becomes the largest, and is supported so as to be movable along a path along the rotation trajectory in which the movement distance can be most effectively utilized. Effectively, the inertia member can be easily moved relative to the operated means.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, a magnetic material is disposed on a part of the fixed wall, and the auxiliary operation member contains a magnetic material having a polarity opposite to that of the magnetic material disposed on the fixed wall. A gaming machine D6 configured to be attracted by a magnetic force when the auxiliary operation member and the fixed wall come into contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, a magnetic material is disposed on a part of the fixed wall, and can be adsorbed by a magnetic force when the auxiliary operation member and the fixed wall come into contact with each other. Therefore, the arrangement of the auxiliary operation member when the operated means is moved at the same speed can be changed between a portion where the magnetic force is attracted and a portion where the magnetic force is not attracted. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the operated means in the portion where the adsorption by the magnetic force occurs.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the input means is movable in a direction intersecting with an input direction of the operated means and a vibrating means that vibrates the operated means, and the operated means An operation unit arranged and operable by a player, wherein the changing unit transmits an operation driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the operation unit, and transmits the driving force of the operation driving unit to the operation unit. Transmitting means, and when the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is longer than the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is short. The game machine D7 is characterized by comprising switching means for increasing the vibration transmission efficiency of the vibration means to the operated means.

  Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibration means, the vibration given to the player when the player operates is more likely to bring the vibration means closer to the part operated by the player. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation part is a position where the impact at the time of the operation is the largest, if the vibration means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during the operation. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to ensure both a feeling of vibration and a long service life of the vibration means.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance becomes long while securing the distance between the vibration means and the operation unit.

  In addition, measures to reduce the feeling of vibration by separating the player's fingers from the vibration means while increasing the operation target by separating the operation unit from the operated means and making it easy for the player to operate the input means. As described above, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to ensure (level) the vibration applied to the player who touches the input means.

  As a result, the operation unit moves away from the operated means, and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation where the expectation is high in appearance (so-called “super hot” situation) The uncomfortable feeling due to the extremely weak feeling can be eliminated.

  Note that the expectation includes a reach development expectation and a jackpot occurrence expectation. Here, the reach development expectation is a ratio, possibility or expectation to develop into reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is a ratio, possibility or expectation that a jackpot is generated.

  Note that the sense of vibration includes a sense of vibration received by a player who touched the member through the member, or a sense received by other senses (for example, vision) without touching the member (for example, of the member). Sense of understanding that it is vibrating by the presence of an afterimage in the vicinity.

  In the gaming machine D7, the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed increases or decreases depending on the location, and the operation driving means is arranged on the side where the speed of the operated means decreases. Game machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D7, when a severe operation such as hitting the operated device is performed, the impact given to the operation driving device is maintained while maintaining the intensity of the operation. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an operation mode in which the level of the operation speed varies depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported and does not rotate in the circumferential direction of a circle around the axis, or is not supported. In both cases, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D7 or D8, the operation unit is separated from the operated unit by a driving force of the operation driving unit, and the switching unit includes a changing unit that can connect the operated unit and the operating unit. The degree changing means generates a biasing force that moves the operation portion in a direction approaching the operated means, and the biasing force is a distance between the operated means and the operating portion. A gaming machine D9, which increases as the length increases.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7 or D8, by generating a biasing force that the degree changing means varies, the operating portion can be maintained on the side close to the operated means, and the operated means Adjusts the buffering action of vibration transmission between the control unit and the operating part (keeps the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating part are arranged close to each other, and reduces the buffering action when arranged at a distance) )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

  In addition, the aspect of a grade change means is not specifically limited. For example, it may be formed from a metal elastic spring or an air spring.

  In any one of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the switching unit approaches the vibrating unit along a direction intersecting a moving direction of the operated unit as the operating unit moves away from the operated unit, and at least the And a second transmission means that can be brought into contact with the vibration means when the operating portion is farthest from the operated means, wherein the displacing means places the operating portion with respect to the operated means. A gaming machine D10 comprising a connecting means for operably connecting along a direction crossing the moving direction of the game machine D10.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means Therefore, it is possible to easily give the player who touches the operation unit the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means.

  For example, when the operation mode of the operated means is a rotation operation around a predetermined axis, vibration in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because there is no moment relation), large vibrations transmitted to the player can be ensured even when the operation unit is away from the operated means.

  Note that the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit can be changed. Thereby, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed. Can be achieved.

  For example, when the operation driving means, the transmission means, and the second transmission means are accommodated in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the transmission path of the driving force is changed by the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance is increased. Can be prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines D7 to D10, the transmission unit includes a release unit that cancels transmission of the driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation driving unit. Game machine D11.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D7 to D10, the operation driving means is overloaded by the player operating the operation unit with an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as failure. Thereby, the freedom degree of operation of an operation part can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D7 to D11, the operated means is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable along the input direction, and the operation portion is separated from a rotation axis of the operated means, A gaming machine D12 characterized by moving away from the means.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D7 to D11, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is determined by the movement of the operating portion by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force given to the player who operates an operation part can be changed according to the movement amount of an operation part.

  Also, the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit when the operation target is the largest distance from the operated means (the operation range becomes the largest and easy to operate) is reduced. Therefore, the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation can be reduced. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation unit.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the load changing unit includes a biasing unit that generates a biasing force along an operation direction of the operated unit, and the biasing unit is configured to move the operated unit. A first state that is configured to be deformable and maintains the amount of movement of the operated means from the predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the biasing means equal, and the amount of deformation of the biasing means from the predetermined state The gaming machine D13 is characterized in that it can be switched between a second state in which the value is less than the amount of movement of the operated means.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves by a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control the elastic coefficient of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed in accordance with the operation timing.

  In addition, the aspect of the load change with respect to the deformation amount is not limited at all. For example, a linear change mode (such as an elastic spring) or a non-linear deformation mode may be used.

  In the gaming machine D13, the load changing means is disposed on the urging means and disposed on the operation side portion that contacts the operated means, and on the opposite side of the urging means to the operation side portion. During the input operation, at least one of the main body side portion supported by the control unit, the contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion, A game machine D14, comprising: a position changing means capable of changing to a side where the urging force of the urging means is weakened.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D13, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operation length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the biasing means during the input operation. The rate of change of the load given to the player as the reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

  In the gaming machine D14, the position changing means is a first state in which the state is fixed in proximity to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the biasing means, and the first state in which the state is released is released. A moving means capable of switching between two states by movement; a movement driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means; and a control means for controlling a driving mode of the movement driving means. The first state includes a first invariable range and a second invariable range as ranges in which a load applied to the player is maintained even when a positional deviation from the operated means occurs in the second state, and each of the invariable ranges includes the operated range. The game machine is arranged in order from the movement base end side along the movement direction of the means, and is set in such a manner that the length of the second invariable range is longer than the length of the first invariable range. D15.

  According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D14, the second invariant range arranged on the moving distal end side is longer than the first invariant range arranged on the moving proximal end side. As the operation speed of the operated means increases, the invariable range in which the moving means is supported moves toward the moving tip of the operated means (the supporting position of the moving means moves toward the moving tip of the operated means). Therefore, the load applied to the player can be reduced when operating at the second speed compared to operating at the first speed.

  In addition, you may make it cancel | release the support of either edge part of a biasing means. In addition, when canceling the support point on the pedal side, it is essential to move along the peripheral surface (not in a mode of being pushed by the operation tip surface).

  In addition, when the moving direction of a pedal and the moving direction of a moving means are orthogonal, it can suppress that the reaction force given to a player at the time of operation changes to the drive timing of a moving means.

  In the gaming machine D14 or D15, the control means sets the moving means to the first state and the second state in a time shorter than the time required for the operated means to move through the moving range at the second speed. A gaming machine D16 that is controlled in a switching mode.

  According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D14 or D15, the operation of the operated means can be prevented from being completed while the moving means is maintained in the first state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the player when operated at the second speed from becoming larger than the load applied to the player when operated at the first speed.

  It is possible to perform control to change the support position by the position changing means by driving the movement driving means based on the control means. Therefore, the load applied to the player via the biasing means can be changed by control.

  In the gaming machine D16, the position changing means can change at least one of a contact position between the operated means and the operation side part or a support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side part in a plurality of stages. The control means moves the moving means in such a manner that the contact position and the support position cannot be changed in a plurality of stages while the position changing means is maintained in the second state. Characteristic gaming machine D17.

  According to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D16, depending on the number of times the moving means is maintained in the second state, the contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, or the gaming machine main body The maximum number of times of change of at least one of the support positions with the main body side portion can be defined. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the contact position or the support position described above from changing too much regardless of the speed at which the operated means is operated.

  In the gaming machine D17, at least one of a contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion or a support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is changed at a predetermined stage. The gaming machine D18, wherein the urging force generated from the urging means toward the operated means disappears.

  According to the gaming machine D18, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D18, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operation side part or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the body side part is at a predetermined stage. When changed, the reaction force generated by the urging means out of the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operated means disappears, so that the player can easily notice the change in the reaction force.

  In any of the gaming machines D15 to D18, a change in at least one of a contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion or a support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is determined by the operation A gaming machine D19, which is caused by execution of an operation of means.

  According to the gaming machine D19, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D15 to D18, a change in the urging force (the degree of change) of the urging means is caused by the player operating the operated means ( That is, since the state of the biasing means is not changed in advance), it is prevented that the biasing force of the biasing means changes from the state of the operated means before the operation (for example, appearance). Thus, the operation of the operated means can be promoted.

  In addition, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, it is possible to easily change the change mode of the urging force depending on the operation mode.

  In any of the gaming machines D14 to D19, provided with notifying means for notifying the player of the operation of the input means for a predetermined period, and the notifying by the notifying means prompts an operation at the first speed Further, the gaming machine D20 is characterized in that the load changing means functions.

  According to the gaming machine D20, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D14 to D19, by operating the input means by preventing the load on the operation from increasing until the stage where the operation timing is not precisely defined The feeling of fatigue given to the player can be reduced. Thereby, the stress given to the player when operating the input means can be reduced, and the possibility (or probability) that the player will participate in the game by operating the input means can be increased.

<An example of the technical idea that the tilting device is locked at a position where the type of operation changes>
In a gaming machine including an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means includes an operated means for input operation by the player, and a locking means for locking movement of the operated means, The operated means can change the input mode by at least a first input and a second input according to an operation amount, and is locked to the locking means at a locking position where the second input is not performed. A gaming machine E1 that is characterized by being played.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the player is provided with operated means for performing a push-in operation, and the input mode is changed in accordance with the push-in amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine to be played (see, for example, JP 2012-024322 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to pay attention to the posture of the operated means in order to change the timing of input, and the push amount is adjusted by the load applied to the player from the operated means There is a problem that it is difficult to stop the operated means at the timing when the input mode is changed.

  For this reason, for example, the boundary between the continuous hit operation and the push operation for changing the push amount cannot be recognized, and there is a possibility that the continuous hit operation may be performed while entering the range of the push operation, and there is a possibility that the game cannot be comfortably performed. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the operated means is locked by the locking means at a position where the second input of the operated means is not performed, the position where the second input is input to the operated means. It can be stopped reliably before invading. Therefore, the operation of the operated means can be completed within the first input range, and the comfort of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movement speed of the operated means becomes excessive as compared with the case where the movement range is divided without being locked halfway. Thereby, it is possible to prevent damage to the operated means.

  The mode of the locking means is not particularly limited, and various modes can be adopted. For example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which a member that locks the operated means is moved close to the operated means by a solenoid or a spring by detecting that the operated means is disposed at the locking position. A fixed magnet that is attracted in a state where the means is arranged at a predetermined position may be provided and locked by the attracting. Further, when the operated means rotates, it may be locked in relation to the shape of the shaft rod that supports the operated means and the shape of the shaft hole that supports the shaft rod.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a biasing unit that generates a biasing force that moves the operated unit toward an initial position, and the locking of the operated unit by the locking unit is performed up to the locked position. The gaming machine E2 is released by an operation of the second stage that is started after the means is moved.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the unlocking of the operated means by the locking means moves the operated means to the locking position against the biasing force of the biasing means. Since it is canceled by the operation of the second stage that is started later, it is possible to suppress the operation after the locking position from being performed vigorously. Thereby, the operation of moving the operated means at a stroke from the state where the operated means is arranged at the initial position to the moving end can be suppressed.

  The second stage operation that is started after the operated means is moved to the locking position is, for example, pushed in the same direction again at the locking position when the operated means is pushed. Examples include operation, operation to be pushed in a direction different from the direction pushed to reach the locking position, trigger member in a mode imitating a trigger on the operated means, and operation to pull the trigger member. The

  In the gaming machine E2, the operating direction of the operation in the second stage is different from the operating direction of the operation performed from the state where the operated means is disposed at the initial position. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the operation direction of the second stage operation is different from the operation direction of the operation performed from the state where the operated means is disposed at the initial position. Therefore, for example, when a continuous hitting operation is requested in a state where the operated means is arranged between the initial position and the locking position, the operated means is mistakenly placed in the locked position. Even if the operation means is pressed, the operated means is not unlocked, so that the continuous hitting operation can be continued. Thereby, it can suppress that a player misoperates a to-be-operated means unexpectedly.

  In the gaming machine E2, the operated means is configured to be capable of rotating, and the rotation axis of the operated means is a first axis serving as a rotation center in a state where the operated means is disposed at an initial position, and the first axis thereof. It is possible to move between a second axis different from one axis, and the movement of the rotating shaft can be started in a state where the operated means is arranged at the locking position. When the operated means rotates about the first axis, a contact locking member is provided that contacts the operated means in the circumferential direction, and when the operated means rotates about the second axis, The gaming machine E4, wherein the contact between the operated means and the contact locking member is released.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, whether or not the operated means comes into contact with the contact locking member of the contact means rotates about the first rotation axis. Since it changes depending on whether it rotates around the second rotation axis, the operated means can be locked and unlocked without adding another movable member. Thereby, reduction of the number of members can be aimed at.

  In addition, as a case where the movement of the rotating shaft can be started in a state where the operated means is arranged at the locking position, the shape of the rotating shaft of the operated means is not a perfect circle but an incomplete shape having a notch. When the shaft hole, which is formed of a circle and has a convex portion inside rather than a perfect circle, is formed with a convex portion, the notched and convex portions are in a state where the operated means is disposed at the locking position. The case where the rotary shaft and the shaft hole are formed in a shape that allows the rotary shaft to move from the first position to the second position along the shaft hole in the posture is exemplified. .

  Note that the rotational shaft and the shaft hole are not limited in shape, and may be configured by a cylindrical rotational shaft and a long-hole shaft hole, and the rotational shaft and the shaft hole are both uneven. You may comprise in the unusual shape which has.

  In the gaming machine E4, an urging force generated by the urging means includes a direction in which the rotation of the operated means returns to the initial position side, and a direction in which the rotation shaft of the operated means returns to the first axis side. A gaming machine E5 that can be applied in both directions.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the biasing force generated by the biasing means causes the rotation of the operated means to return to the initial position side, and the rotation axis of the operated means is the first axis. Since it is applied in both directions of returning to the side, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of urging means provided as the movement direction of the operated means increases.

  In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the rotation operation from the initial position of the operated means is a push-in operation performed from the front to the back with respect to the player playing the operated means, and the first axis is The gaming machine E6 is arranged on the front side of the second axis.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E4 or E5, the rotation operation from the initial position of the operated means is performed from the front to the back with respect to the player playing the operated means. Since the first axis is arranged closer to the second axis than the second axis, it is applied to the operated means from the player when the rotation axis of the operated means is moved from the first axis to the second axis. The angle between the direction of the load and the direction of the load applied by the player when the operated means is rotated is reduced, and the rotation axis of the operated means is smoothly moved from the operation of rotating the operated means. You can move on to the operation.

<Minimum configuration is the top of gaming machine C, and some limitations are the top of gaming machines A and E>
In a gaming machine including an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies an input operation to the player, and applies a load in the direction opposite to the input operation to the operated means and the load. Load changing means configured to be variable, the load changing means comprising: a first urging means for transmitting an urging force to the operated means; and the opposite of the operated means with respect to the first urging means. A second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the side, and disposed between the first urging means and the second urging means, and the first urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. A gaming machine F1 comprising: an urging force changing means formed so that the urging force generated by the urging means and the second urging means can be changed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in a mode in which a player has an operated means for performing a pushing operation, and the input is switched in accordance with the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine to be controlled (see, for example, JP 2010-252949 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the urging means for applying the urging force to the operated means is formed by a single coil spring, so that the difference in reaction force can be detected from the stage where the operating width of the operated means is small. Has a problem of lack of realism during operation. That is, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to change the reaction force only when the pushing width becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first urging means for applying the urging force to the operated means by the urging force changing means, and the second urging means connected in series to the first urging means. Since the deformation mode can be adjusted, for example, the reaction force within a small operation amount of the operated member can be kept unchanged, and the reaction force can be changed after the operated means is sufficiently operated. . Thereby, a sense of reality at the time of operation can be increased.

  In the gaming machine F1, the urging force changing means includes load generating means formed so as to be able to apply a load in a direction along the operation direction of the operated means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, by applying a load to the biasing force changing means by the load generating means, the biasing force of the first biasing means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means, The relationship with the urging force of the urging means can be changed.

  In the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the load from the load generating means is formed so as to disappear when the operation amount of the operated means exceeds a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the load from the load generating means disappears when the operation amount of the operated means exceeds a predetermined amount, so during the operation of the operated means, It is possible to continuously set an operation amount range in which a load from the load generation means is generated and an operation amount range in which no load is generated from the load generation means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the biasing force changing means includes interlocking means that moves in accordance with movement of the operated means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, it is impossible to grasp the change in load applied to the player via the operated means before the operated means is operated. It can be.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the urging force changing means includes expansion / contraction means that expands and contracts along a direction in which the first urging means and the second urging means are arranged in series. Machine F5.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, at least one of the first biasing means and the second biasing means is contracted in advance in a state where the position of the operated means is maintained. The reaction force against the arrangement of the operated means can be changed.

  The expansion / contraction mode of the expansion / contraction means is not limited at all. For example, the upper plate and the lower plate may be driven and the interval may be changed, or an arbitrary number of plates may be inserted between the upper plate and the lower plate, and the thickness may be expanded or contracted. good.

  In the gaming machine F5, the expansion / contraction means is formed to be capable of expansion / contraction to one side of the first urging means side or the second urging means side.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the urging force generated with respect to the arrangement of the operated means of the first urging means or the second urging means can be changed independently.

  In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the expansion / contraction means is expanded / contracted by a driving force of a single driving means.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the expansion / contraction means can be expanded and contracted by a single driving means, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the biasing force changing means includes an intermediate means movably disposed between the first biasing means and the second biasing means, the first biasing means, and the first biasing means. A gaming machine F8 comprising: regulation means configured to be able to regulate movement of the intermediate means in a direction in which two urging means are connected in series.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first biasing means and the first biasing means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means depending on whether the movement of the intermediate means is permitted or restricted. The urging force generated by the two urging means can be switched.

  In the gaming machine F8, the restriction means includes a plurality of contact means formed so as to be able to contact the intermediate means.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the movement of the intermediate means can be restricted by a plurality of contact means. Therefore, the movement of the intermediate means can be restricted at a plurality of positions while using a single restricting means.

  In the gaming machine F9, the plurality of abutting means are formed with different lengths in the moving direction of the intermediate means of the opposed arrangement surfaces opposed to the intermediate means.

  According to the gaming machine F10, the length of the intermediate means in the moving direction of the opposing arrangement surfaces of the plurality of contact means is formed differently, so that each contact means corresponds to various operation modes of the intermediate means. Can do.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (notification means)
201 MPU (control means)
300 to 17300 Operation device (input means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310, 5310, 6310, 7310, 8310, 9310, 12310, 13310, 14310 Tilt device (operated means)
332 Action claw part (action part)
332b Lower end surface (contact portion)
332d Front arc portion (a part of the first contact section)
332e Rear arc portion (part of second contact section)
343 Torsion spring (biasing means, first elastic spring member)
362 Energizing device (part of adjusting means, part of changing means)
362a Piston member (part of second elastic spring member, part of elastic spring member, operation side part)
362b coil spring (a part of the second elastic spring member, a part of the elastic spring member, a part of the urging means, the first urging means)
410 Fastening fixing part (part of connecting means)
420, 15420 First arm (part of the connecting means)
440, 14440 Operation part 450 Drive motor (operation drive means)
451 First cam (part of release means)
460 Transmission device (transmission means)
464 Second cam (part of release means)
470 Vibration transmission member (part of switching means, second transmission means)
2326 Switching member (moving member)
5372 Escape hole (part of blocking means)
5380 Third biasing device (part of load changing means)
5383 Torsion spring (part of elastic spring member)
6316 Curved wall (side wall)
6380 Fourth biasing device (part of load changing means)
6381 Rotating member (braking auxiliary member)
7318 Slide device (part of locking means)
7319a Action member (part of auxiliary operation member)
7319c Inertia acting member (inertia member)
8319a Action member (part of auxiliary motion member)
9343 Torsion spring (part of biasing means)
9361i Locking rubber member (part of the contact locking member)
9371a Locking plane (part of the contact locking member)
10362, 11362, 16362, 17362 Energizing device (part of load changing means)
10362d Moving end member (main body side, part of interlocking means, part of intermediate means)
10362e, 16362e, 17362e Return spring (second urging means)
10362f Stepped member (moving means, part of position changing means, part of biasing force changing means, regulating means)
11362f Stepped member (moving means, part of position changing means, part of biasing force changing means, regulating means)
16362g Lowering device (part of biasing force changing means, part of load generating means)
17362d Moving end member (part of expansion / contraction means, part of intermediate means)
17362g member deformation device (part of biasing force changing means, part of expansion / contraction means)
17362g3 drive motor (drive means)
M1 drive motor (rotary motor, drive means, part of vibration means)
M1a weight member (part of vibration means)
Ma1 moving magnet (part of the working part)
Ma2 fixed magnet (magnetic load member)
Ma81 fixed magnet (part of fixed wall)
MT1, MT2, MT3 Protrusion (part of contact means)
MT1a, MT2a, MT3a Locking surface (part of the facing surface)
MTU, MTB Protrusion (part of contact means)
N1 straight line O1 rotation axis SP1 spring (part of switching means, degree changing means)
SOL10, SOL11 drive solenoid (part of drive means, position change means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine including an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies an input operation to the player, and applies a load in the direction opposite to the input operation to the operated means and the load. Load changing means configured to be variable, and
The load changing means includes first biasing means for transmitting a biasing force to the operated means;
Second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the opposite side of the operated means with respect to the first urging means;
Arranged between the first urging means and the second urging means, the urging force generated by the first urging means and the second urging means can be changed with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. And a biasing force changing means.
The biasing force changing means is
Intermediate means movably disposed between the first biasing means and the second biasing means;
And a restricting means configured to be capable of restricting movement of the intermediate means in a direction in which the first urging means and the second urging means are connected in series.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the restricting means includes a plurality of contact means formed so as to be able to contact the intermediate means. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the plurality of abutting means are formed with different lengths in the moving direction of the intermediate means on the opposed arrangement surface opposed to the intermediate means.

Images